| 1 | \input texinfo | 
|---|
| 2 | @setfilename ld.info | 
|---|
| 3 | @c Copyright 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, | 
|---|
| 4 | @c 2001 Free Software Foundation, Inc. | 
|---|
| 5 | @syncodeindex ky cp | 
|---|
| 6 | @include configdoc.texi | 
|---|
| 7 | @c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile) | 
|---|
| 8 | @include ldver.texi | 
|---|
| 9 |  | 
|---|
| 10 | @c @smallbook | 
|---|
| 11 |  | 
|---|
| 12 | @ifinfo | 
|---|
| 13 | @format | 
|---|
| 14 | START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY | 
|---|
| 15 | * Ld: (ld).                       The GNU linker. | 
|---|
| 16 | END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY | 
|---|
| 17 | @end format | 
|---|
| 18 | @end ifinfo | 
|---|
| 19 |  | 
|---|
| 20 | @ifinfo | 
|---|
| 21 | This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD version @value{VERSION}. | 
|---|
| 22 |  | 
|---|
| 23 | Copyright (C) 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc. | 
|---|
| 24 |  | 
|---|
| 25 | @ignore | 
|---|
| 26 |  | 
|---|
| 27 | Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document | 
|---|
| 28 | under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 | 
|---|
| 29 | or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; | 
|---|
| 30 | with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no | 
|---|
| 31 | Back-Cover Texts.  A copy of the license is included in the | 
|---|
| 32 | section entitled "GNU Free Documentation License". | 
|---|
| 33 |  | 
|---|
| 34 | Permission is granted to process this file through Tex and print the | 
|---|
| 35 | results, provided the printed document carries copying permission | 
|---|
| 36 | notice identical to this one except for the removal of this paragraph | 
|---|
| 37 | (this paragraph not being relevant to the printed manual). | 
|---|
| 38 |  | 
|---|
| 39 | @end ignore | 
|---|
| 40 | @end ifinfo | 
|---|
| 41 | @iftex | 
|---|
| 42 | @finalout | 
|---|
| 43 | @setchapternewpage odd | 
|---|
| 44 | @settitle Using LD, the GNU linker | 
|---|
| 45 | @titlepage | 
|---|
| 46 | @title Using ld | 
|---|
| 47 | @subtitle The GNU linker | 
|---|
| 48 | @sp 1 | 
|---|
| 49 | @subtitle @code{ld} version 2 | 
|---|
| 50 | @subtitle Version @value{VERSION} | 
|---|
| 51 | @author Steve Chamberlain | 
|---|
| 52 | @author Ian Lance Taylor | 
|---|
| 53 | @page | 
|---|
| 54 |  | 
|---|
| 55 | @tex | 
|---|
| 56 | {\parskip=0pt | 
|---|
| 57 | \hfill Red Hat Inc\par | 
|---|
| 58 | \hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par | 
|---|
| 59 | \hfill {\it Using LD, the GNU linker}\par | 
|---|
| 60 | \hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par | 
|---|
| 61 | } | 
|---|
| 62 | \global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way. | 
|---|
| 63 | @end tex | 
|---|
| 64 |  | 
|---|
| 65 | @vskip 0pt plus 1filll | 
|---|
| 66 | Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc. | 
|---|
| 67 |  | 
|---|
| 68 | Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document | 
|---|
| 69 | under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 | 
|---|
| 70 | or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; | 
|---|
| 71 | with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no | 
|---|
| 72 | Back-Cover Texts.  A copy of the license is included in the | 
|---|
| 73 | section entitled "GNU Free Documentation License". | 
|---|
| 74 |  | 
|---|
| 75 | @end titlepage | 
|---|
| 76 | @end iftex | 
|---|
| 77 | @c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker! | 
|---|
| 78 |  | 
|---|
| 79 | @ifinfo | 
|---|
| 80 | @node Top | 
|---|
| 81 | @top Using ld | 
|---|
| 82 | This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld version @value{VERSION}. | 
|---|
| 83 |  | 
|---|
| 84 | This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free | 
|---|
| 85 | Documentation License.  A copy of the license is included in the | 
|---|
| 86 | section entitled "GNU Free Documentation License". | 
|---|
| 87 |  | 
|---|
| 88 | @menu | 
|---|
| 89 | * Overview::                    Overview | 
|---|
| 90 | * Invocation::                  Invocation | 
|---|
| 91 | * Scripts::                     Linker Scripts | 
|---|
| 92 | @ifset GENERIC | 
|---|
| 93 | * Machine Dependent::           Machine Dependent Features | 
|---|
| 94 | @end ifset | 
|---|
| 95 | @ifclear GENERIC | 
|---|
| 96 | @ifset H8300 | 
|---|
| 97 | * H8/300::                      ld and the H8/300 | 
|---|
| 98 | @end ifset | 
|---|
| 99 | @ifset Hitachi | 
|---|
| 100 | * Hitachi::                     ld and other Hitachi micros | 
|---|
| 101 | @end ifset | 
|---|
| 102 | @ifset I960 | 
|---|
| 103 | * i960::                        ld and the Intel 960 family | 
|---|
| 104 | @end ifset | 
|---|
| 105 | @ifset TICOFF | 
|---|
| 106 | * TI COFF::                     ld and the TI COFF | 
|---|
| 107 | @end ifset | 
|---|
| 108 | @end ifclear | 
|---|
| 109 | @ifclear SingleFormat | 
|---|
| 110 | * BFD::                         BFD | 
|---|
| 111 | @end ifclear | 
|---|
| 112 | @c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus | 
|---|
| 113 |  | 
|---|
| 114 | * Reporting Bugs::              Reporting Bugs | 
|---|
| 115 | * MRI::                         MRI Compatible Script Files | 
|---|
| 116 | * GNU Free Documentation License::  GNU Free Documentation License | 
|---|
| 117 | * Index::                       Index | 
|---|
| 118 | @end menu | 
|---|
| 119 | @end ifinfo | 
|---|
| 120 |  | 
|---|
| 121 | @node Overview | 
|---|
| 122 | @chapter Overview | 
|---|
| 123 |  | 
|---|
| 124 | @cindex @sc{gnu} linker | 
|---|
| 125 | @cindex what is this? | 
|---|
| 126 | @code{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates | 
|---|
| 127 | their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in | 
|---|
| 128 | compiling a program is to run @code{ld}. | 
|---|
| 129 |  | 
|---|
| 130 | @code{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in | 
|---|
| 131 | a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax, | 
|---|
| 132 | to provide explicit and total control over the linking process. | 
|---|
| 133 |  | 
|---|
| 134 | @ifclear SingleFormat | 
|---|
| 135 | This version of @code{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries | 
|---|
| 136 | to operate on object files. This allows @code{ld} to read, combine, and | 
|---|
| 137 | write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or | 
|---|
| 138 | @code{a.out}.  Different formats may be linked together to produce any | 
|---|
| 139 | available kind of object file.  @xref{BFD}, for more information. | 
|---|
| 140 | @end ifclear | 
|---|
| 141 |  | 
|---|
| 142 | Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other | 
|---|
| 143 | linkers in providing diagnostic information.  Many linkers abandon | 
|---|
| 144 | execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible, | 
|---|
| 145 | @code{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors | 
|---|
| 146 | (or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error). | 
|---|
| 147 |  | 
|---|
| 148 | @node Invocation | 
|---|
| 149 | @chapter Invocation | 
|---|
| 150 |  | 
|---|
| 151 | The @sc{gnu} linker @code{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations, | 
|---|
| 152 | and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers.  As a result, | 
|---|
| 153 | you have many choices to control its behavior. | 
|---|
| 154 |  | 
|---|
| 155 | @ifset UsesEnvVars | 
|---|
| 156 | @menu | 
|---|
| 157 | * Options::                     Command Line Options | 
|---|
| 158 | * Environment::                 Environment Variables | 
|---|
| 159 | @end menu | 
|---|
| 160 |  | 
|---|
| 161 | @node Options | 
|---|
| 162 | @section Command Line Options | 
|---|
| 163 | @end ifset | 
|---|
| 164 |  | 
|---|
| 165 | @cindex command line | 
|---|
| 166 | @cindex options | 
|---|
| 167 | The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual | 
|---|
| 168 | practice few of them are used in any particular context. | 
|---|
| 169 | @cindex standard Unix system | 
|---|
| 170 | For instance, a frequent use of @code{ld} is to link standard Unix | 
|---|
| 171 | object files on a standard, supported Unix system.  On such a system, to | 
|---|
| 172 | link a file @code{hello.o}: | 
|---|
| 173 |  | 
|---|
| 174 | @smallexample | 
|---|
| 175 | ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc | 
|---|
| 176 | @end smallexample | 
|---|
| 177 |  | 
|---|
| 178 | This tells @code{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the | 
|---|
| 179 | result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and | 
|---|
| 180 | the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search | 
|---|
| 181 | directories.  (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.) | 
|---|
| 182 |  | 
|---|
| 183 | Some of the command-line options to @code{ld} may be specified at any | 
|---|
| 184 | point in the command line.  However, options which refer to files, such | 
|---|
| 185 | as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at | 
|---|
| 186 | which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object | 
|---|
| 187 | files and other file options.  Repeating non-file options with a | 
|---|
| 188 | different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior | 
|---|
| 189 | occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that | 
|---|
| 190 | option.  Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are | 
|---|
| 191 | noted in the descriptions below. | 
|---|
| 192 |  | 
|---|
| 193 | @cindex object files | 
|---|
| 194 | Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked | 
|---|
| 195 | together.  They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line | 
|---|
| 196 | options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between | 
|---|
| 197 | an option and its argument. | 
|---|
| 198 |  | 
|---|
| 199 | Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can | 
|---|
| 200 | specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R}, | 
|---|
| 201 | and the script command language.  If @emph{no} binary input files at all | 
|---|
| 202 | are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the | 
|---|
| 203 | message @samp{No input files}. | 
|---|
| 204 |  | 
|---|
| 205 | If the linker can not recognize the format of an object file, it will | 
|---|
| 206 | assume that it is a linker script.  A script specified in this way | 
|---|
| 207 | augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default | 
|---|
| 208 | linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}).  This feature | 
|---|
| 209 | permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object | 
|---|
| 210 | or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses | 
|---|
| 211 | @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects.  Note that | 
|---|
| 212 | specifying a script in this way should only be used to augment the main | 
|---|
| 213 | linker script; if you want to use some command that logically can only | 
|---|
| 214 | appear once, such as the @code{SECTIONS} or @code{MEMORY} command, you | 
|---|
| 215 | must replace the default linker script using the @samp{-T} option. | 
|---|
| 216 | @xref{Scripts}. | 
|---|
| 217 |  | 
|---|
| 218 | For options whose names are a single letter, | 
|---|
| 219 | option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening | 
|---|
| 220 | whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the | 
|---|
| 221 | option that requires them. | 
|---|
| 222 |  | 
|---|
| 223 | For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can | 
|---|
| 224 | precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and | 
|---|
| 225 | @samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent.  Note - there is one exception to | 
|---|
| 226 | this rule.  Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can | 
|---|
| 227 | only be preceeded by two dashes.  This is to reduce confusion with the | 
|---|
| 228 | @samp{-o} option.  So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file | 
|---|
| 229 | name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the | 
|---|
| 230 | output. | 
|---|
| 231 |  | 
|---|
| 232 | Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the | 
|---|
| 233 | option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments | 
|---|
| 234 | immediately following the option that requires them.  For example, | 
|---|
| 235 | @samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent. | 
|---|
| 236 | Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are | 
|---|
| 237 | accepted. | 
|---|
| 238 |  | 
|---|
| 239 | Note - if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver | 
|---|
| 240 | (eg @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be | 
|---|
| 241 | prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular | 
|---|
| 242 | compiler driver) like this: | 
|---|
| 243 |  | 
|---|
| 244 | @smallexample | 
|---|
| 245 | gcc -Wl,--startgroup foo.o bar.o -Wl,--endgroup | 
|---|
| 246 | @end smallexample | 
|---|
| 247 |  | 
|---|
| 248 | This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may | 
|---|
| 249 | silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. | 
|---|
| 250 |  | 
|---|
| 251 | Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU | 
|---|
| 252 | linker: | 
|---|
| 253 |  | 
|---|
| 254 | @table @code | 
|---|
| 255 | @kindex -a@var{keyword} | 
|---|
| 256 | @item -a@var{keyword} | 
|---|
| 257 | This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility.  The @var{keyword} | 
|---|
| 258 | argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or | 
|---|
| 259 | @samp{default}.  @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to | 
|---|
| 260 | @samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent | 
|---|
| 261 | to @samp{-Bdynamic}.  This option may be used any number of times. | 
|---|
| 262 |  | 
|---|
| 263 | @ifset I960 | 
|---|
| 264 | @cindex architectures | 
|---|
| 265 | @kindex -A@var{arch} | 
|---|
| 266 | @item -A@var{architecture} | 
|---|
| 267 | @kindex --architecture=@var{arch} | 
|---|
| 268 | @itemx --architecture=@var{architecture} | 
|---|
| 269 | In the current release of @code{ld}, this option is useful only for the | 
|---|
| 270 | Intel 960 family of architectures.  In that @code{ld} configuration, the | 
|---|
| 271 | @var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in | 
|---|
| 272 | the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the | 
|---|
| 273 | archive-library search path.  @xref{i960,,@code{ld} and the Intel 960 | 
|---|
| 274 | family}, for details. | 
|---|
| 275 |  | 
|---|
| 276 | Future releases of @code{ld} may support similar functionality for | 
|---|
| 277 | other architecture families. | 
|---|
| 278 | @end ifset | 
|---|
| 279 |  | 
|---|
| 280 | @ifclear SingleFormat | 
|---|
| 281 | @cindex binary input format | 
|---|
| 282 | @kindex -b @var{format} | 
|---|
| 283 | @kindex --format=@var{format} | 
|---|
| 284 | @cindex input format | 
|---|
| 285 | @cindex input format | 
|---|
| 286 | @item -b @var{input-format} | 
|---|
| 287 | @itemx --format=@var{input-format} | 
|---|
| 288 | @code{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object | 
|---|
| 289 | file.  If your @code{ld} is configured this way, you can use the | 
|---|
| 290 | @samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files | 
|---|
| 291 | that follow this option on the command line.  Even when @code{ld} is | 
|---|
| 292 | configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need | 
|---|
| 293 | to specify this, as @code{ld} should be configured to expect as a | 
|---|
| 294 | default input format the most usual format on each machine. | 
|---|
| 295 | @var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format | 
|---|
| 296 | supported by the BFD libraries.  (You can list the available binary | 
|---|
| 297 | formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) | 
|---|
| 298 | @xref{BFD}. | 
|---|
| 299 |  | 
|---|
| 300 | You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual | 
|---|
| 301 | binary format.  You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when | 
|---|
| 302 | linking object files of different formats), by including | 
|---|
| 303 | @samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a | 
|---|
| 304 | particular format. | 
|---|
| 305 |  | 
|---|
| 306 | The default format is taken from the environment variable | 
|---|
| 307 | @code{GNUTARGET}. | 
|---|
| 308 | @ifset UsesEnvVars | 
|---|
| 309 | @xref{Environment}. | 
|---|
| 310 | @end ifset | 
|---|
| 311 | You can also define the input format from a script, using the command | 
|---|
| 312 | @code{TARGET}; see @ref{Format Commands}. | 
|---|
| 313 | @end ifclear | 
|---|
| 314 |  | 
|---|
| 315 | @kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile} | 
|---|
| 316 | @kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile} | 
|---|
| 317 | @cindex compatibility, MRI | 
|---|
| 318 | @item -c @var{MRI-commandfile} | 
|---|
| 319 | @itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile} | 
|---|
| 320 | For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @code{ld} accepts script | 
|---|
| 321 | files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in | 
|---|
| 322 | @ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.  Introduce MRI script files with | 
|---|
| 323 | the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker | 
|---|
| 324 | scripts written in the general-purpose @code{ld} scripting language. | 
|---|
| 325 | If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories | 
|---|
| 326 | specified by any @samp{-L} options. | 
|---|
| 327 |  | 
|---|
| 328 | @cindex common allocation | 
|---|
| 329 | @kindex -d | 
|---|
| 330 | @kindex -dc | 
|---|
| 331 | @kindex -dp | 
|---|
| 332 | @item -d | 
|---|
| 333 | @itemx -dc | 
|---|
| 334 | @itemx -dp | 
|---|
| 335 | These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for | 
|---|
| 336 | compatibility with other linkers.  They assign space to common symbols | 
|---|
| 337 | even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}).  The | 
|---|
| 338 | script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect. | 
|---|
| 339 | @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}. | 
|---|
| 340 |  | 
|---|
| 341 | @cindex entry point, from command line | 
|---|
| 342 | @kindex -e @var{entry} | 
|---|
| 343 | @kindex --entry=@var{entry} | 
|---|
| 344 | @item -e @var{entry} | 
|---|
| 345 | @itemx --entry=@var{entry} | 
|---|
| 346 | Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your | 
|---|
| 347 | program, rather than the default entry point.  If there is no symbol | 
|---|
| 348 | named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number, | 
|---|
| 349 | and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in | 
|---|
| 350 | base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading | 
|---|
| 351 | @samp{0} for base 8).  @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults | 
|---|
| 352 | and other ways of specifying the entry point. | 
|---|
| 353 |  | 
|---|
| 354 | @cindex dynamic symbol table | 
|---|
| 355 | @kindex -E | 
|---|
| 356 | @kindex --export-dynamic | 
|---|
| 357 | @item -E | 
|---|
| 358 | @itemx --export-dynamic | 
|---|
| 359 | When creating a dynamically linked executable, add all symbols to the | 
|---|
| 360 | dynamic symbol table.  The dynamic symbol table is the set of symbols | 
|---|
| 361 | which are visible from dynamic objects at run time. | 
|---|
| 362 |  | 
|---|
| 363 | If you do not use this option, the dynamic symbol table will normally | 
|---|
| 364 | contain only those symbols which are referenced by some dynamic object | 
|---|
| 365 | mentioned in the link. | 
|---|
| 366 |  | 
|---|
| 367 | If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer | 
|---|
| 368 | back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other | 
|---|
| 369 | dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when | 
|---|
| 370 | linking the program itself. | 
|---|
| 371 |  | 
|---|
| 372 | @cindex big-endian objects | 
|---|
| 373 | @cindex endianness | 
|---|
| 374 | @kindex -EB | 
|---|
| 375 | @item -EB | 
|---|
| 376 | Link big-endian objects.  This affects the default output format. | 
|---|
| 377 |  | 
|---|
| 378 | @cindex little-endian objects | 
|---|
| 379 | @kindex -EL | 
|---|
| 380 | @item -EL | 
|---|
| 381 | Link little-endian objects.  This affects the default output format. | 
|---|
| 382 |  | 
|---|
| 383 | @kindex -f | 
|---|
| 384 | @kindex --auxiliary | 
|---|
| 385 | @item -f | 
|---|
| 386 | @itemx --auxiliary @var{name} | 
|---|
| 387 | When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field | 
|---|
| 388 | to the specified name.  This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol | 
|---|
| 389 | table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the | 
|---|
| 390 | symbol table of the shared object @var{name}. | 
|---|
| 391 |  | 
|---|
| 392 | If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you | 
|---|
| 393 | run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field.  If | 
|---|
| 394 | the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will | 
|---|
| 395 | first check whether there is a definition in the shared object | 
|---|
| 396 | @var{name}.  If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition | 
|---|
| 397 | in the filter object.  The shared object @var{name} need not exist. | 
|---|
| 398 | Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative | 
|---|
| 399 | implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for | 
|---|
| 400 | machine specific performance. | 
|---|
| 401 |  | 
|---|
| 402 | This option may be specified more than once.  The DT_AUXILIARY entries | 
|---|
| 403 | will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line. | 
|---|
| 404 |  | 
|---|
| 405 | @kindex -F | 
|---|
| 406 | @kindex --filter | 
|---|
| 407 | @item -F @var{name} | 
|---|
| 408 | @itemx --filter @var{name} | 
|---|
| 409 | When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to | 
|---|
| 410 | the specified name.  This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table | 
|---|
| 411 | of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter | 
|---|
| 412 | on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}. | 
|---|
| 413 |  | 
|---|
| 414 | If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you | 
|---|
| 415 | run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field.  The | 
|---|
| 416 | dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the | 
|---|
| 417 | filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions | 
|---|
| 418 | found in the shared object @var{name}.  Thus the filter object can be | 
|---|
| 419 | used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object | 
|---|
| 420 | @var{name}. | 
|---|
| 421 |  | 
|---|
| 422 | Some older linkers used the @code{-F} option throughout a compilation | 
|---|
| 423 | toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output | 
|---|
| 424 | object files.  The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this | 
|---|
| 425 | purpose: the @code{-b}, @code{--format}, @code{--oformat} options, the | 
|---|
| 426 | @code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET} | 
|---|
| 427 | environment variable.  The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @code{-F} | 
|---|
| 428 | option when not creating an ELF shared object. | 
|---|
| 429 |  | 
|---|
| 430 | @cindex finalization function | 
|---|
| 431 | @kindex -fini | 
|---|
| 432 | @item -fini @var{name} | 
|---|
| 433 | When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the | 
|---|
| 434 | executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the | 
|---|
| 435 | address of the function.  By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as | 
|---|
| 436 | the function to call. | 
|---|
| 437 |  | 
|---|
| 438 | @kindex -g | 
|---|
| 439 | @item -g | 
|---|
| 440 | Ignored.  Provided for compatibility with other tools. | 
|---|
| 441 |  | 
|---|
| 442 | @kindex -G | 
|---|
| 443 | @kindex --gpsize | 
|---|
| 444 | @cindex object size | 
|---|
| 445 | @item -G@var{value} | 
|---|
| 446 | @itemx --gpsize=@var{value} | 
|---|
| 447 | Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to | 
|---|
| 448 | @var{size}.  This is only meaningful for object file formats such as | 
|---|
| 449 | MIPS ECOFF which supports putting large and small objects into different | 
|---|
| 450 | sections.  This is ignored for other object file formats. | 
|---|
| 451 |  | 
|---|
| 452 | @cindex runtime library name | 
|---|
| 453 | @kindex -h@var{name} | 
|---|
| 454 | @kindex -soname=@var{name} | 
|---|
| 455 | @item -h@var{name} | 
|---|
| 456 | @itemx -soname=@var{name} | 
|---|
| 457 | When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to | 
|---|
| 458 | the specified name.  When an executable is linked with a shared object | 
|---|
| 459 | which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic | 
|---|
| 460 | linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME | 
|---|
| 461 | field rather than the using the file name given to the linker. | 
|---|
| 462 |  | 
|---|
| 463 | @kindex -i | 
|---|
| 464 | @cindex incremental link | 
|---|
| 465 | @item -i | 
|---|
| 466 | Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}). | 
|---|
| 467 |  | 
|---|
| 468 | @cindex initialization function | 
|---|
| 469 | @kindex -init | 
|---|
| 470 | @item -init @var{name} | 
|---|
| 471 | When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the | 
|---|
| 472 | executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address | 
|---|
| 473 | of the function.  By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the | 
|---|
| 474 | function to call. | 
|---|
| 475 |  | 
|---|
| 476 | @cindex archive files, from cmd line | 
|---|
| 477 | @kindex -l@var{archive} | 
|---|
| 478 | @kindex --library=@var{archive} | 
|---|
| 479 | @item -l@var{archive} | 
|---|
| 480 | @itemx --library=@var{archive} | 
|---|
| 481 | Add archive file @var{archive} to the list of files to link.  This | 
|---|
| 482 | option may be used any number of times.  @code{ld} will search its | 
|---|
| 483 | path-list for occurrences of @code{lib@var{archive}.a} for every | 
|---|
| 484 | @var{archive} specified. | 
|---|
| 485 |  | 
|---|
| 486 | On systems which support shared libraries, @code{ld} may also search for | 
|---|
| 487 | libraries with extensions other than @code{.a}.  Specifically, on ELF | 
|---|
| 488 | and SunOS systems, @code{ld} will search a directory for a library with | 
|---|
| 489 | an extension of @code{.so} before searching for one with an extension of | 
|---|
| 490 | @code{.a}.  By convention, a @code{.so} extension indicates a shared | 
|---|
| 491 | library. | 
|---|
| 492 |  | 
|---|
| 493 | The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is | 
|---|
| 494 | specified on the command line.  If the archive defines a symbol which | 
|---|
| 495 | was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the | 
|---|
| 496 | command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the | 
|---|
| 497 | archive.  However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on | 
|---|
| 498 | the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again. | 
|---|
| 499 |  | 
|---|
| 500 | See the @code{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search | 
|---|
| 501 | archives multiple times. | 
|---|
| 502 |  | 
|---|
| 503 | You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line. | 
|---|
| 504 |  | 
|---|
| 505 | @ifset GENERIC | 
|---|
| 506 | This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers.  However, | 
|---|
| 507 | if you are using @code{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the | 
|---|
| 508 | behaviour of the AIX linker. | 
|---|
| 509 | @end ifset | 
|---|
| 510 |  | 
|---|
| 511 | @cindex search directory, from cmd line | 
|---|
| 512 | @kindex -L@var{dir} | 
|---|
| 513 | @kindex --library-path=@var{dir} | 
|---|
| 514 | @item -L@var{searchdir} | 
|---|
| 515 | @itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir} | 
|---|
| 516 | Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @code{ld} will search | 
|---|
| 517 | for archive libraries and @code{ld} control scripts.  You may use this | 
|---|
| 518 | option any number of times.  The directories are searched in the order | 
|---|
| 519 | in which they are specified on the command line.  Directories specified | 
|---|
| 520 | on the command line are searched before the default directories.  All | 
|---|
| 521 | @code{-L} options apply to all @code{-l} options, regardless of the | 
|---|
| 522 | order in which the options appear. | 
|---|
| 523 |  | 
|---|
| 524 | @ifset UsesEnvVars | 
|---|
| 525 | The default set of paths searched (without being specified with | 
|---|
| 526 | @samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @code{ld} is using, and in | 
|---|
| 527 | some cases also on how it was configured.  @xref{Environment}. | 
|---|
| 528 | @end ifset | 
|---|
| 529 |  | 
|---|
| 530 | The paths can also be specified in a link script with the | 
|---|
| 531 | @code{SEARCH_DIR} command.  Directories specified this way are searched | 
|---|
| 532 | at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line. | 
|---|
| 533 |  | 
|---|
| 534 | @cindex emulation | 
|---|
| 535 | @kindex -m @var{emulation} | 
|---|
| 536 | @item -m@var{emulation} | 
|---|
| 537 | Emulate the @var{emulation} linker.  You can list the available | 
|---|
| 538 | emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. | 
|---|
| 539 |  | 
|---|
| 540 | If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the | 
|---|
| 541 | @code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined. | 
|---|
| 542 |  | 
|---|
| 543 | Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was | 
|---|
| 544 | configured. | 
|---|
| 545 |  | 
|---|
| 546 | @cindex link map | 
|---|
| 547 | @kindex -M | 
|---|
| 548 | @kindex --print-map | 
|---|
| 549 | @item -M | 
|---|
| 550 | @itemx --print-map | 
|---|
| 551 | Print a link map to the standard output.  A link map provides | 
|---|
| 552 | information about the link, including the following: | 
|---|
| 553 |  | 
|---|
| 554 | @itemize @bullet | 
|---|
| 555 | @item | 
|---|
| 556 | Where object files and symbols are mapped into memory. | 
|---|
| 557 | @item | 
|---|
| 558 | How common symbols are allocated. | 
|---|
| 559 | @item | 
|---|
| 560 | All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol | 
|---|
| 561 | which caused the archive member to be brought in. | 
|---|
| 562 | @end itemize | 
|---|
| 563 |  | 
|---|
| 564 | @kindex -n | 
|---|
| 565 | @cindex read-only text | 
|---|
| 566 | @cindex NMAGIC | 
|---|
| 567 | @kindex --nmagic | 
|---|
| 568 | @item -n | 
|---|
| 569 | @itemx --nmagic | 
|---|
| 570 | Turn off page alignment of sections, and mark the output as | 
|---|
| 571 | @code{NMAGIC} if possible. | 
|---|
| 572 |  | 
|---|
| 573 | @kindex -N | 
|---|
| 574 | @kindex --omagic | 
|---|
| 575 | @cindex read/write from cmd line | 
|---|
| 576 | @cindex OMAGIC | 
|---|
| 577 | @item -N | 
|---|
| 578 | @itemx --omagic | 
|---|
| 579 | Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable.  Also, do | 
|---|
| 580 | not page-align the data segment.  If the output format supports Unix | 
|---|
| 581 | style magic numbers, mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. | 
|---|
| 582 |  | 
|---|
| 583 | @kindex -o @var{output} | 
|---|
| 584 | @kindex --output=@var{output} | 
|---|
| 585 | @cindex naming the output file | 
|---|
| 586 | @item -o @var{output} | 
|---|
| 587 | @itemx --output=@var{output} | 
|---|
| 588 | Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @code{ld}; if this | 
|---|
| 589 | option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default.  The | 
|---|
| 590 | script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name. | 
|---|
| 591 |  | 
|---|
| 592 | @kindex -O @var{level} | 
|---|
| 593 | @cindex generating optimized output | 
|---|
| 594 | @item -O @var{level} | 
|---|
| 595 | If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @code{ld} optimizes | 
|---|
| 596 | the output.  This might take significantly longer and therefore probably | 
|---|
| 597 | should only be enabled for the final binary. | 
|---|
| 598 |  | 
|---|
| 599 | @kindex -q | 
|---|
| 600 | @kindex --emit-relocs | 
|---|
| 601 | @cindex retain relocations in final executable | 
|---|
| 602 | @item -q | 
|---|
| 603 | @itemx --emit-relocs | 
|---|
| 604 | Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked exececutables. | 
|---|
| 605 | Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in | 
|---|
| 606 | order to perform correct modifications of executables.  This results | 
|---|
| 607 | in larger executables. | 
|---|
| 608 |  | 
|---|
| 609 | @cindex partial link | 
|---|
| 610 | @cindex relocatable output | 
|---|
| 611 | @kindex -r | 
|---|
| 612 | @kindex --relocateable | 
|---|
| 613 | @item -r | 
|---|
| 614 | @itemx --relocateable | 
|---|
| 615 | Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in | 
|---|
| 616 | turn serve as input to @code{ld}.  This is often called @dfn{partial | 
|---|
| 617 | linking}.  As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix | 
|---|
| 618 | magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to | 
|---|
| 619 | @code{OMAGIC}. | 
|---|
| 620 | @c ; see @code{-N}. | 
|---|
| 621 | If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced.  When | 
|---|
| 622 | linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to | 
|---|
| 623 | constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}. | 
|---|
| 624 |  | 
|---|
| 625 | This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}. | 
|---|
| 626 |  | 
|---|
| 627 | @kindex -R @var{file} | 
|---|
| 628 | @kindex --just-symbols=@var{file} | 
|---|
| 629 | @cindex symbol-only input | 
|---|
| 630 | @item -R @var{filename} | 
|---|
| 631 | @itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename} | 
|---|
| 632 | Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not | 
|---|
| 633 | relocate it or include it in the output.  This allows your output file | 
|---|
| 634 | to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other | 
|---|
| 635 | programs.  You may use this option more than once. | 
|---|
| 636 |  | 
|---|
| 637 | For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @code{-R} option is | 
|---|
| 638 | followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as | 
|---|
| 639 | the @code{-rpath} option. | 
|---|
| 640 |  | 
|---|
| 641 | @kindex -s | 
|---|
| 642 | @kindex --strip-all | 
|---|
| 643 | @cindex strip all symbols | 
|---|
| 644 | @item -s | 
|---|
| 645 | @itemx --strip-all | 
|---|
| 646 | Omit all symbol information from the output file. | 
|---|
| 647 |  | 
|---|
| 648 | @kindex -S | 
|---|
| 649 | @kindex --strip-debug | 
|---|
| 650 | @cindex strip debugger symbols | 
|---|
| 651 | @item -S | 
|---|
| 652 | @itemx --strip-debug | 
|---|
| 653 | Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file. | 
|---|
| 654 |  | 
|---|
| 655 | @kindex -t | 
|---|
| 656 | @kindex --trace | 
|---|
| 657 | @cindex input files, displaying | 
|---|
| 658 | @item -t | 
|---|
| 659 | @itemx --trace | 
|---|
| 660 | Print the names of the input files as @code{ld} processes them. | 
|---|
| 661 |  | 
|---|
| 662 | @kindex -T @var{script} | 
|---|
| 663 | @kindex --script=@var{script} | 
|---|
| 664 | @cindex script files | 
|---|
| 665 | @item -T @var{scriptfile} | 
|---|
| 666 | @itemx --script=@var{scriptfile} | 
|---|
| 667 | Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script.  This script replaces | 
|---|
| 668 | @code{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so | 
|---|
| 669 | @var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the | 
|---|
| 670 | output file.  You must use this option if you want to use a command | 
|---|
| 671 | which can only appear once in a linker script, such as the | 
|---|
| 672 | @code{SECTIONS} or @code{MEMORY} command.  @xref{Scripts}.  If | 
|---|
| 673 | @var{scriptfile} does not exist in the current directory, @code{ld} | 
|---|
| 674 | looks for it in the directories specified by any preceding @samp{-L} | 
|---|
| 675 | options.  Multiple @samp{-T} options accumulate. | 
|---|
| 676 |  | 
|---|
| 677 | @kindex -u @var{symbol} | 
|---|
| 678 | @kindex --undefined=@var{symbol} | 
|---|
| 679 | @cindex undefined symbol | 
|---|
| 680 | @item -u @var{symbol} | 
|---|
| 681 | @itemx --undefined=@var{symbol} | 
|---|
| 682 | Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined | 
|---|
| 683 | symbol.  Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional | 
|---|
| 684 | modules from standard libraries.  @samp{-u} may be repeated with | 
|---|
| 685 | different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols.  This | 
|---|
| 686 | option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command. | 
|---|
| 687 |  | 
|---|
| 688 | @kindex -Ur | 
|---|
| 689 | @cindex constructors | 
|---|
| 690 | @item -Ur | 
|---|
| 691 | For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to | 
|---|
| 692 | @samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in | 
|---|
| 693 | turn serve as input to @code{ld}.  When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur} | 
|---|
| 694 | @emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}. | 
|---|
| 695 | It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked | 
|---|
| 696 | with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot | 
|---|
| 697 | be added to.  Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and | 
|---|
| 698 | @samp{-r} for the others. | 
|---|
| 699 |  | 
|---|
| 700 | @kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}] | 
|---|
| 701 | @item --unique[=@var{SECTION}] | 
|---|
| 702 | Creates a separate output section for every input section matching | 
|---|
| 703 | @var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is | 
|---|
| 704 | missing, for every orphan input section.  An orphan section is one not | 
|---|
| 705 | specifically mentioned in a linker script.  You may use this option | 
|---|
| 706 | multiple times on the command line;  It prevents the normal merging of | 
|---|
| 707 | input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments | 
|---|
| 708 | in a linker script. | 
|---|
| 709 |  | 
|---|
| 710 | @kindex -v | 
|---|
| 711 | @kindex -V | 
|---|
| 712 | @kindex --version | 
|---|
| 713 | @cindex version | 
|---|
| 714 | @item -v | 
|---|
| 715 | @itemx --version | 
|---|
| 716 | @itemx -V | 
|---|
| 717 | Display the version number for @code{ld}.  The @code{-V} option also | 
|---|
| 718 | lists the supported emulations. | 
|---|
| 719 |  | 
|---|
| 720 | @kindex -x | 
|---|
| 721 | @kindex --discard-all | 
|---|
| 722 | @cindex deleting local symbols | 
|---|
| 723 | @item -x | 
|---|
| 724 | @itemx --discard-all | 
|---|
| 725 | Delete all local symbols. | 
|---|
| 726 |  | 
|---|
| 727 | @kindex -X | 
|---|
| 728 | @kindex --discard-locals | 
|---|
| 729 | @cindex local symbols, deleting | 
|---|
| 730 | @cindex L, deleting symbols beginning | 
|---|
| 731 | @item -X | 
|---|
| 732 | @itemx --discard-locals | 
|---|
| 733 | Delete all temporary local symbols.  For most targets, this is all local | 
|---|
| 734 | symbols whose names begin with @samp{L}. | 
|---|
| 735 |  | 
|---|
| 736 | @kindex -y @var{symbol} | 
|---|
| 737 | @kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol} | 
|---|
| 738 | @cindex symbol tracing | 
|---|
| 739 | @item -y @var{symbol} | 
|---|
| 740 | @itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol} | 
|---|
| 741 | Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears.  This | 
|---|
| 742 | option may be given any number of times.  On many systems it is necessary | 
|---|
| 743 | to prepend an underscore. | 
|---|
| 744 |  | 
|---|
| 745 | This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but | 
|---|
| 746 | don't know where the reference is coming from. | 
|---|
| 747 |  | 
|---|
| 748 | @kindex -Y @var{path} | 
|---|
| 749 | @item -Y @var{path} | 
|---|
| 750 | Add @var{path} to the default library search path.  This option exists | 
|---|
| 751 | for Solaris compatibility. | 
|---|
| 752 |  | 
|---|
| 753 | @kindex -z @var{keyword} | 
|---|
| 754 | @item -z @var{keyword} | 
|---|
| 755 | The recognized keywords are @code{initfirst}, @code{interpose}, | 
|---|
| 756 | @code{loadfltr}, @code{nodefaultlib}, @code{nodelete}, @code{nodlopen}, | 
|---|
| 757 | @code{nodump}, @code{now} and @code{origin}. The other keywords are | 
|---|
| 758 | ignored for Solaris compatibility. @code{initfirst} marks the object | 
|---|
| 759 | to be initialized first at runtime before any other objects. | 
|---|
| 760 | @code{interpose} marks the object that its symbol table interposes | 
|---|
| 761 | before all symbols but the primary executable. @code{loadfltr} marks | 
|---|
| 762 | the object that its filtees be processed immediately at runtime. | 
|---|
| 763 | @code{nodefaultlib} marks the object that the search for dependencies | 
|---|
| 764 | of this object will ignore any default library search paths. | 
|---|
| 765 | @code{nodelete} marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime. | 
|---|
| 766 | @code{nodlopen} marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}. | 
|---|
| 767 | @code{nodump} marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}. | 
|---|
| 768 | @code{now} marks the object with the non-lazy runtime binding. | 
|---|
| 769 | @code{origin} marks the object may contain $ORIGIN. | 
|---|
| 770 | @code{defs} disallows undefined symbols. | 
|---|
| 771 |  | 
|---|
| 772 | @kindex -( | 
|---|
| 773 | @cindex groups of archives | 
|---|
| 774 | @item -( @var{archives} -) | 
|---|
| 775 | @itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group | 
|---|
| 776 | The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files.  They may be | 
|---|
| 777 | either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options. | 
|---|
| 778 |  | 
|---|
| 779 | The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined | 
|---|
| 780 | references are created.  Normally, an archive is searched only once in | 
|---|
| 781 | the order that it is specified on the command line.  If a symbol in that | 
|---|
| 782 | archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an | 
|---|
| 783 | object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker | 
|---|
| 784 | would not be able to resolve that reference.  By grouping the archives, | 
|---|
| 785 | they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are | 
|---|
| 786 | resolved. | 
|---|
| 787 |  | 
|---|
| 788 | Using this option has a significant performance cost.  It is best to use | 
|---|
| 789 | it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or | 
|---|
| 790 | more archives. | 
|---|
| 791 |  | 
|---|
| 792 | @kindex -assert @var{keyword} | 
|---|
| 793 | @item -assert @var{keyword} | 
|---|
| 794 | This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility. | 
|---|
| 795 |  | 
|---|
| 796 | @kindex -Bdynamic | 
|---|
| 797 | @kindex -dy | 
|---|
| 798 | @kindex -call_shared | 
|---|
| 799 | @item -Bdynamic | 
|---|
| 800 | @itemx -dy | 
|---|
| 801 | @itemx -call_shared | 
|---|
| 802 | Link against dynamic libraries.  This is only meaningful on platforms | 
|---|
| 803 | for which shared libraries are supported.  This option is normally the | 
|---|
| 804 | default on such platforms.  The different variants of this option are | 
|---|
| 805 | for compatibility with various systems.  You may use this option | 
|---|
| 806 | multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for | 
|---|
| 807 | @code{-l} options which follow it. | 
|---|
| 808 |  | 
|---|
| 809 | @kindex -Bgroup | 
|---|
| 810 | @item -Bgroup | 
|---|
| 811 | Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic | 
|---|
| 812 | section.  This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this | 
|---|
| 813 | object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group. | 
|---|
| 814 | @code{--no-undefined} is implied.  This option is only meaningful on ELF | 
|---|
| 815 | platforms which support shared libraries. | 
|---|
| 816 |  | 
|---|
| 817 | @kindex -Bstatic | 
|---|
| 818 | @kindex -dn | 
|---|
| 819 | @kindex -non_shared | 
|---|
| 820 | @kindex -static | 
|---|
| 821 | @item -Bstatic | 
|---|
| 822 | @itemx -dn | 
|---|
| 823 | @itemx -non_shared | 
|---|
| 824 | @itemx -static | 
|---|
| 825 | Do not link against shared libraries.  This is only meaningful on | 
|---|
| 826 | platforms for which shared libraries are supported.  The different | 
|---|
| 827 | variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems.  You | 
|---|
| 828 | may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects | 
|---|
| 829 | library searching for @code{-l} options which follow it. | 
|---|
| 830 |  | 
|---|
| 831 | @kindex -Bsymbolic | 
|---|
| 832 | @item -Bsymbolic | 
|---|
| 833 | When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the | 
|---|
| 834 | definition within the shared library, if any.  Normally, it is possible | 
|---|
| 835 | for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition | 
|---|
| 836 | within the shared library.  This option is only meaningful on ELF | 
|---|
| 837 | platforms which support shared libraries. | 
|---|
| 838 |  | 
|---|
| 839 | @kindex --check-sections | 
|---|
| 840 | @kindex --no-check-sections | 
|---|
| 841 | @item --check-sections | 
|---|
| 842 | @itemx --no-check-sections | 
|---|
| 843 | Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have | 
|---|
| 844 | been assigned to see if there any overlaps.  Normally the linker will | 
|---|
| 845 | perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce | 
|---|
| 846 | suitable error messages.  The linker does know about, and does make | 
|---|
| 847 | allowances for sections in overlays.  The default behaviour can be | 
|---|
| 848 | restored by using the command line switch @samp{--check-sections}. | 
|---|
| 849 |  | 
|---|
| 850 | @cindex cross reference table | 
|---|
| 851 | @kindex --cref | 
|---|
| 852 | @item --cref | 
|---|
| 853 | Output a cross reference table.  If a linker map file is being | 
|---|
| 854 | generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file. | 
|---|
| 855 | Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output. | 
|---|
| 856 |  | 
|---|
| 857 | The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be | 
|---|
| 858 | easily processed by a script if necessary.  The symbols are printed out, | 
|---|
| 859 | sorted by name.  For each symbol, a list of file names is given.  If the | 
|---|
| 860 | symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the | 
|---|
| 861 | definition.  The remaining files contain references to the symbol. | 
|---|
| 862 |  | 
|---|
| 863 | @cindex symbols, from command line | 
|---|
| 864 | @kindex --defsym @var{symbol}=@var{exp} | 
|---|
| 865 | @item --defsym @var{symbol}=@var{expression} | 
|---|
| 866 | Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute | 
|---|
| 867 | address given by @var{expression}.  You may use this option as many | 
|---|
| 868 | times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line.  A | 
|---|
| 869 | limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this | 
|---|
| 870 | context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing | 
|---|
| 871 | symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal | 
|---|
| 872 | constants or symbols.  If you need more elaborate expressions, consider | 
|---|
| 873 | using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments,, | 
|---|
| 874 | Assignment: Symbol Definitions}).  @emph{Note:} there should be no white | 
|---|
| 875 | space between @var{symbol}, the equals sign (``@key{=}''), and | 
|---|
| 876 | @var{expression}. | 
|---|
| 877 |  | 
|---|
| 878 | @cindex demangling, from command line | 
|---|
| 879 | @kindex --demangle[=@var{style}] | 
|---|
| 880 | @kindex --no-demangle | 
|---|
| 881 | @item --demangle[=@var{style}] | 
|---|
| 882 | @itemx --no-demangle | 
|---|
| 883 | These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages | 
|---|
| 884 | and other output.  When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to | 
|---|
| 885 | present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading | 
|---|
| 886 | underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++ | 
|---|
| 887 | mangled symbol names into user readable names.  Different compilers have | 
|---|
| 888 | different mangling styles.  The optional demangling style argument can be used | 
|---|
| 889 | to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler.  The linker will | 
|---|
| 890 | demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} | 
|---|
| 891 | is set.  These options may be used to override the default. | 
|---|
| 892 |  | 
|---|
| 893 | @cindex dynamic linker, from command line | 
|---|
| 894 | @kindex --dynamic-linker @var{file} | 
|---|
| 895 | @item --dynamic-linker @var{file} | 
|---|
| 896 | Set the name of the dynamic linker.  This is only meaningful when | 
|---|
| 897 | generating dynamically linked ELF executables.  The default dynamic | 
|---|
| 898 | linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are | 
|---|
| 899 | doing. | 
|---|
| 900 |  | 
|---|
| 901 | @cindex MIPS embedded PIC code | 
|---|
| 902 | @kindex --embedded-relocs | 
|---|
| 903 | @item --embedded-relocs | 
|---|
| 904 | This option is only meaningful when linking MIPS embedded PIC code, | 
|---|
| 905 | generated by the -membedded-pic option to the @sc{gnu} compiler and | 
|---|
| 906 | assembler.  It causes the linker to create a table which may be used at | 
|---|
| 907 | runtime to relocate any data which was statically initialized to pointer | 
|---|
| 908 | values.  See the code in testsuite/ld-empic for details. | 
|---|
| 909 |  | 
|---|
| 910 | @kindex --force-exe-suffix | 
|---|
| 911 | @item  --force-exe-suffix | 
|---|
| 912 | Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix. | 
|---|
| 913 |  | 
|---|
| 914 | If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a | 
|---|
| 915 | @code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy | 
|---|
| 916 | the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This | 
|---|
| 917 | option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft | 
|---|
| 918 | Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless | 
|---|
| 919 | it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix. | 
|---|
| 920 |  | 
|---|
| 921 | @kindex --gc-sections | 
|---|
| 922 | @kindex --no-gc-sections | 
|---|
| 923 | @cindex garbage collection | 
|---|
| 924 | @item --no-gc-sections | 
|---|
| 925 | @itemx --gc-sections | 
|---|
| 926 | Enable garbage collection of unused input sections.  It is ignored on | 
|---|
| 927 | targets that do not support this option.  This option is not compatible | 
|---|
| 928 | with @samp{-r}, nor should it be used with dynamic linking.  The default | 
|---|
| 929 | behaviour (of not performing this garbage collection) can be restored by | 
|---|
| 930 | specifying @samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. | 
|---|
| 931 |  | 
|---|
| 932 | @cindex help | 
|---|
| 933 | @cindex usage | 
|---|
| 934 | @kindex --help | 
|---|
| 935 | @item --help | 
|---|
| 936 | Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit. | 
|---|
| 937 |  | 
|---|
| 938 | @kindex --target-help | 
|---|
| 939 | @item --target-help | 
|---|
| 940 | Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit. | 
|---|
| 941 |  | 
|---|
| 942 | @kindex -Map | 
|---|
| 943 | @item -Map @var{mapfile} | 
|---|
| 944 | Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}.  See the description of the | 
|---|
| 945 | @samp{-M} option, above. | 
|---|
| 946 |  | 
|---|
| 947 | @cindex memory usage | 
|---|
| 948 | @kindex --no-keep-memory | 
|---|
| 949 | @item --no-keep-memory | 
|---|
| 950 | @code{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the | 
|---|
| 951 | symbol tables of input files in memory.  This option tells @code{ld} to | 
|---|
| 952 | instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as | 
|---|
| 953 | necessary.  This may be required if @code{ld} runs out of memory space | 
|---|
| 954 | while linking a large executable. | 
|---|
| 955 |  | 
|---|
| 956 | @kindex --no-undefined | 
|---|
| 957 | @kindex -z defs | 
|---|
| 958 | @item --no-undefined | 
|---|
| 959 | @itemx -z defs | 
|---|
| 960 | Normally when creating a non-symbolic shared library, undefined symbols | 
|---|
| 961 | are allowed and left to be resolved by the runtime loader.  These options | 
|---|
| 962 | disallow such undefined symbols. | 
|---|
| 963 |  | 
|---|
| 964 | @kindex --allow-shlib-undefined | 
|---|
| 965 | @item --allow-shlib-undefined | 
|---|
| 966 | Allow undefined symbols in shared objects even  when --no-undefined is | 
|---|
| 967 | set. The net result will be that undefined symbols in regular objects | 
|---|
| 968 | will still trigger an error, but undefined symbols in shared objects | 
|---|
| 969 | will be ignored.  The implementation of no_undefined makes the | 
|---|
| 970 | assumption that the runtime linker will choke on undefined symbols. | 
|---|
| 971 | However there is at least one system (BeOS) where undefined symbols in | 
|---|
| 972 | shared libraries is normal since the kernel patches them at load time to | 
|---|
| 973 | select which function is most appropriate for the current architecture. | 
|---|
| 974 | I.E. dynamically select an appropriate memset function.  Apparently it | 
|---|
| 975 | is also normal for HPPA shared libraries to have undefined symbols. | 
|---|
| 976 |  | 
|---|
| 977 | @kindex --no-warn-mismatch | 
|---|
| 978 | @item --no-warn-mismatch | 
|---|
| 979 | Normally @code{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input | 
|---|
| 980 | files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have | 
|---|
| 981 | been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses. | 
|---|
| 982 | This option tells @code{ld} that it should silently permit such possible | 
|---|
| 983 | errors.  This option should only be used with care, in cases when you | 
|---|
| 984 | have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are | 
|---|
| 985 | inappropriate. | 
|---|
| 986 |  | 
|---|
| 987 | @kindex --no-whole-archive | 
|---|
| 988 | @item --no-whole-archive | 
|---|
| 989 | Turn off the effect of the @code{--whole-archive} option for subsequent | 
|---|
| 990 | archive files. | 
|---|
| 991 |  | 
|---|
| 992 | @cindex output file after errors | 
|---|
| 993 | @kindex --noinhibit-exec | 
|---|
| 994 | @item --noinhibit-exec | 
|---|
| 995 | Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable. | 
|---|
| 996 | Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters | 
|---|
| 997 | errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file | 
|---|
| 998 | when it issues any error whatsoever. | 
|---|
| 999 |  | 
|---|
| 1000 | @ifclear SingleFormat | 
|---|
| 1001 | @kindex --oformat | 
|---|
| 1002 | @item --oformat @var{output-format} | 
|---|
| 1003 | @code{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object | 
|---|
| 1004 | file.  If your @code{ld} is configured this way, you can use the | 
|---|
| 1005 | @samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output | 
|---|
| 1006 | object file.  Even when @code{ld} is configured to support alternative | 
|---|
| 1007 | object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @code{ld} | 
|---|
| 1008 | should be configured to produce as a default output format the most | 
|---|
| 1009 | usual format on each machine.  @var{output-format} is a text string, the | 
|---|
| 1010 | name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries.  (You can | 
|---|
| 1011 | list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)  The script | 
|---|
| 1012 | command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but | 
|---|
| 1013 | this option overrides it.  @xref{BFD}. | 
|---|
| 1014 | @end ifclear | 
|---|
| 1015 |  | 
|---|
| 1016 | @kindex -qmagic | 
|---|
| 1017 | @item -qmagic | 
|---|
| 1018 | This option is ignored for Linux compatibility. | 
|---|
| 1019 |  | 
|---|
| 1020 | @kindex -Qy | 
|---|
| 1021 | @item -Qy | 
|---|
| 1022 | This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility. | 
|---|
| 1023 |  | 
|---|
| 1024 | @kindex --relax | 
|---|
| 1025 | @cindex synthesizing linker | 
|---|
| 1026 | @cindex relaxing addressing modes | 
|---|
| 1027 | @item --relax | 
|---|
| 1028 | An option with machine dependent effects. | 
|---|
| 1029 | @ifset GENERIC | 
|---|
| 1030 | This option is only supported on a few targets. | 
|---|
| 1031 | @end ifset | 
|---|
| 1032 | @ifset H8300 | 
|---|
| 1033 | @xref{H8/300,,@code{ld} and the H8/300}. | 
|---|
| 1034 | @end ifset | 
|---|
| 1035 | @ifset I960 | 
|---|
| 1036 | @xref{i960,, @code{ld} and the Intel 960 family}. | 
|---|
| 1037 | @end ifset | 
|---|
| 1038 |  | 
|---|
| 1039 |  | 
|---|
| 1040 | On some platforms, the @samp{--relax} option performs global | 
|---|
| 1041 | optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves addressing | 
|---|
| 1042 | in the program, such as relaxing address modes and synthesizing new | 
|---|
| 1043 | instructions in the output object file. | 
|---|
| 1044 |  | 
|---|
| 1045 | On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic | 
|---|
| 1046 | debugging of the resulting executable impossible. | 
|---|
| 1047 | @ifset GENERIC | 
|---|
| 1048 | This is known to be | 
|---|
| 1049 | the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300 family of processors. | 
|---|
| 1050 | @end ifset | 
|---|
| 1051 |  | 
|---|
| 1052 | @ifset GENERIC | 
|---|
| 1053 | On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted, | 
|---|
| 1054 | but ignored. | 
|---|
| 1055 | @end ifset | 
|---|
| 1056 |  | 
|---|
| 1057 | @cindex retaining specified symbols | 
|---|
| 1058 | @cindex stripping all but some symbols | 
|---|
| 1059 | @cindex symbols, retaining selectively | 
|---|
| 1060 | @item --retain-symbols-file @var{filename} | 
|---|
| 1061 | Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename}, | 
|---|
| 1062 | discarding all others.  @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one | 
|---|
| 1063 | symbol name per line.  This option is especially useful in environments | 
|---|
| 1064 | @ifset GENERIC | 
|---|
| 1065 | (such as VxWorks) | 
|---|
| 1066 | @end ifset | 
|---|
| 1067 | where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve | 
|---|
| 1068 | run-time memory. | 
|---|
| 1069 |  | 
|---|
| 1070 | @samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols, | 
|---|
| 1071 | or symbols needed for relocations. | 
|---|
| 1072 |  | 
|---|
| 1073 | You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command | 
|---|
| 1074 | line.  It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}. | 
|---|
| 1075 |  | 
|---|
| 1076 | @ifset GENERIC | 
|---|
| 1077 | @item -rpath @var{dir} | 
|---|
| 1078 | @cindex runtime library search path | 
|---|
| 1079 | @kindex -rpath | 
|---|
| 1080 | Add a directory to the runtime library search path.  This is used when | 
|---|
| 1081 | linking an ELF executable with shared objects.  All @code{-rpath} | 
|---|
| 1082 | arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses | 
|---|
| 1083 | them to locate shared objects at runtime.  The @code{-rpath} option is | 
|---|
| 1084 | also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared | 
|---|
| 1085 | objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the | 
|---|
| 1086 | @code{-rpath-link} option.  If @code{-rpath} is not used when linking an | 
|---|
| 1087 | ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable | 
|---|
| 1088 | @code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined. | 
|---|
| 1089 |  | 
|---|
| 1090 | The @code{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS.  By default, on | 
|---|
| 1091 | SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the | 
|---|
| 1092 | @code{-L} options it is given.  If a @code{-rpath} option is used, the | 
|---|
| 1093 | runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @code{-rpath} | 
|---|
| 1094 | options, ignoring the @code{-L} options.  This can be useful when using | 
|---|
| 1095 | gcc, which adds many @code{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted | 
|---|
| 1096 | filesystems. | 
|---|
| 1097 |  | 
|---|
| 1098 | For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @code{-R} option is | 
|---|
| 1099 | followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as | 
|---|
| 1100 | the @code{-rpath} option. | 
|---|
| 1101 | @end ifset | 
|---|
| 1102 |  | 
|---|
| 1103 | @ifset GENERIC | 
|---|
| 1104 | @cindex link-time runtime library search path | 
|---|
| 1105 | @kindex -rpath-link | 
|---|
| 1106 | @item -rpath-link @var{DIR} | 
|---|
| 1107 | When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another.  This | 
|---|
| 1108 | happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one | 
|---|
| 1109 | of the input files. | 
|---|
| 1110 |  | 
|---|
| 1111 | When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared, | 
|---|
| 1112 | non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required | 
|---|
| 1113 | shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included | 
|---|
| 1114 | explicitly.  In such a case, the @code{-rpath-link} option | 
|---|
| 1115 | specifies the first set of directories to search.  The | 
|---|
| 1116 | @code{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names | 
|---|
| 1117 | either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by | 
|---|
| 1118 | appearing multiple times. | 
|---|
| 1119 |  | 
|---|
| 1120 | This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path | 
|---|
| 1121 | that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it | 
|---|
| 1122 | is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the | 
|---|
| 1123 | runtime linker would do. | 
|---|
| 1124 |  | 
|---|
| 1125 | The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared | 
|---|
| 1126 | libraries. | 
|---|
| 1127 | @enumerate | 
|---|
| 1128 | @item | 
|---|
| 1129 | Any directories specified by @code{-rpath-link} options. | 
|---|
| 1130 | @item | 
|---|
| 1131 | Any directories specified by @code{-rpath} options.  The difference | 
|---|
| 1132 | between @code{-rpath} and @code{-rpath-link} is that directories | 
|---|
| 1133 | specified by @code{-rpath} options are included in the executable and | 
|---|
| 1134 | used at runtime, whereas the @code{-rpath-link} option is only effective | 
|---|
| 1135 | at link time. It is for the native linker only. | 
|---|
| 1136 | @item | 
|---|
| 1137 | On an ELF system, if the @code{-rpath} and @code{rpath-link} options | 
|---|
| 1138 | were not used, search the contents of the environment variable | 
|---|
| 1139 | @code{LD_RUN_PATH}. It is for the native linker only. | 
|---|
| 1140 | @item | 
|---|
| 1141 | On SunOS, if the @code{-rpath} option was not used, search any | 
|---|
| 1142 | directories specified using @code{-L} options. | 
|---|
| 1143 | @item | 
|---|
| 1144 | For a native linker, the contents of the environment variable | 
|---|
| 1145 | @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}. | 
|---|
| 1146 | @item | 
|---|
| 1147 | For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or | 
|---|
| 1148 | @code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared | 
|---|
| 1149 | libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if | 
|---|
| 1150 | @code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist. | 
|---|
| 1151 | @item | 
|---|
| 1152 | The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}. | 
|---|
| 1153 | @item | 
|---|
| 1154 | For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf} | 
|---|
| 1155 | exists, the list of directories found in that file. | 
|---|
| 1156 | @end enumerate | 
|---|
| 1157 |  | 
|---|
| 1158 | If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a | 
|---|
| 1159 | warning and continue with the link. | 
|---|
| 1160 | @end ifset | 
|---|
| 1161 |  | 
|---|
| 1162 | @kindex -shared | 
|---|
| 1163 | @kindex -Bshareable | 
|---|
| 1164 | @item -shared | 
|---|
| 1165 | @itemx -Bshareable | 
|---|
| 1166 | @cindex shared libraries | 
|---|
| 1167 | Create a shared library.  This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF | 
|---|
| 1168 | and SunOS platforms.  On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a | 
|---|
| 1169 | shared library if the @code{-e} option is not used and there are | 
|---|
| 1170 | undefined symbols in the link. | 
|---|
| 1171 |  | 
|---|
| 1172 | @item --sort-common | 
|---|
| 1173 | @kindex --sort-common | 
|---|
| 1174 | This option tells @code{ld} to sort the common symbols by size when it | 
|---|
| 1175 | places them in the appropriate output sections.  First come all the one | 
|---|
| 1176 | byte symbols, then all the two bytes, then all the four bytes, and then | 
|---|
| 1177 | everything else.  This is to prevent gaps between symbols due to | 
|---|
| 1178 | alignment constraints. | 
|---|
| 1179 |  | 
|---|
| 1180 | @kindex --split-by-file | 
|---|
| 1181 | @item --split-by-file [@var{size}] | 
|---|
| 1182 | Similar to @code{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for | 
|---|
| 1183 | each input file when @var{size} is reached.  @var{size} defaults to a | 
|---|
| 1184 | size of 1 if not given. | 
|---|
| 1185 |  | 
|---|
| 1186 | @kindex --split-by-reloc | 
|---|
| 1187 | @item --split-by-reloc [@var{count}] | 
|---|
| 1188 | Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single | 
|---|
| 1189 | output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations. | 
|---|
| 1190 | This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into | 
|---|
| 1191 | certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF | 
|---|
| 1192 | cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section.  Note | 
|---|
| 1193 | that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not | 
|---|
| 1194 | support arbitrary sections.  The linker will not split up individual | 
|---|
| 1195 | input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains | 
|---|
| 1196 | more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that | 
|---|
| 1197 | many relocations.  @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768. | 
|---|
| 1198 |  | 
|---|
| 1199 | @kindex --stats | 
|---|
| 1200 | @item --stats | 
|---|
| 1201 | Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such | 
|---|
| 1202 | as execution time and memory usage. | 
|---|
| 1203 |  | 
|---|
| 1204 | @kindex --traditional-format | 
|---|
| 1205 | @cindex traditional format | 
|---|
| 1206 | @item --traditional-format | 
|---|
| 1207 | For some targets, the output of @code{ld} is different in some ways from | 
|---|
| 1208 | the output of some existing linker.  This switch requests @code{ld} to | 
|---|
| 1209 | use the traditional format instead. | 
|---|
| 1210 |  | 
|---|
| 1211 | @cindex dbx | 
|---|
| 1212 | For example, on SunOS, @code{ld} combines duplicate entries in the | 
|---|
| 1213 | symbol string table.  This can reduce the size of an output file with | 
|---|
| 1214 | full debugging information by over 30 percent.  Unfortunately, the SunOS | 
|---|
| 1215 | @code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no | 
|---|
| 1216 | trouble).  The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @code{ld} to not | 
|---|
| 1217 | combine duplicate entries. | 
|---|
| 1218 |  | 
|---|
| 1219 | @kindex --section-start @var{sectionname}=@var{org} | 
|---|
| 1220 | @item --section-start @var{sectionname}=@var{org} | 
|---|
| 1221 | Locate a section in the output file at the absolute | 
|---|
| 1222 | address given by @var{org}.  You may use this option as many | 
|---|
| 1223 | times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command | 
|---|
| 1224 | line. | 
|---|
| 1225 | @var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer; | 
|---|
| 1226 | for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading | 
|---|
| 1227 | @samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values.  @emph{Note:} there | 
|---|
| 1228 | should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals | 
|---|
| 1229 | sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}. | 
|---|
| 1230 |  | 
|---|
| 1231 | @kindex -Tbss @var{org} | 
|---|
| 1232 | @kindex -Tdata @var{org} | 
|---|
| 1233 | @kindex -Ttext @var{org} | 
|---|
| 1234 | @cindex segment origins, cmd line | 
|---|
| 1235 | @item -Tbss @var{org} | 
|---|
| 1236 | @itemx -Tdata @var{org} | 
|---|
| 1237 | @itemx -Ttext @var{org} | 
|---|
| 1238 | Use @var{org} as the starting address for---respectively---the | 
|---|
| 1239 | @code{bss}, @code{data}, or the @code{text} segment of the output file. | 
|---|
| 1240 | @var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer; | 
|---|
| 1241 | for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading | 
|---|
| 1242 | @samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. | 
|---|
| 1243 |  | 
|---|
| 1244 | @kindex --verbose | 
|---|
| 1245 | @cindex verbose | 
|---|
| 1246 | @item --dll-verbose | 
|---|
| 1247 | @itemx --verbose | 
|---|
| 1248 | Display the version number for @code{ld} and list the linker emulations | 
|---|
| 1249 | supported.  Display which input files can and cannot be opened.  Display | 
|---|
| 1250 | the linker script if using a default builtin script. | 
|---|
| 1251 |  | 
|---|
| 1252 | @kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile} | 
|---|
| 1253 | @cindex version script, symbol versions | 
|---|
| 1254 | @itemx --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile} | 
|---|
| 1255 | Specify the name of a version script to the linker.  This is typically | 
|---|
| 1256 | used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information | 
|---|
| 1257 | about the version heirarchy for the library being created.  This option | 
|---|
| 1258 | is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries. | 
|---|
| 1259 | @xref{VERSION}. | 
|---|
| 1260 |  | 
|---|
| 1261 | @kindex --warn-comon | 
|---|
| 1262 | @cindex warnings, on combining symbols | 
|---|
| 1263 | @cindex combining symbols, warnings on | 
|---|
| 1264 | @item --warn-common | 
|---|
| 1265 | Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with | 
|---|
| 1266 | a symbol definition.  Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice, | 
|---|
| 1267 | but linkers on some other operating systems do not.  This option allows | 
|---|
| 1268 | you to find potential problems from combining global symbols. | 
|---|
| 1269 | Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some | 
|---|
| 1270 | warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs. | 
|---|
| 1271 |  | 
|---|
| 1272 | There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples: | 
|---|
| 1273 |  | 
|---|
| 1274 | @table @samp | 
|---|
| 1275 | @item int i = 1; | 
|---|
| 1276 | A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output | 
|---|
| 1277 | file. | 
|---|
| 1278 |  | 
|---|
| 1279 | @item extern int i; | 
|---|
| 1280 | An undefined reference, which does not allocate space. | 
|---|
| 1281 | There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the | 
|---|
| 1282 | variable somewhere. | 
|---|
| 1283 |  | 
|---|
| 1284 | @item int i; | 
|---|
| 1285 | A common symbol.  If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a | 
|---|
| 1286 | variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file. | 
|---|
| 1287 | The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a | 
|---|
| 1288 | single symbol.  If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest | 
|---|
| 1289 | size.  The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is | 
|---|
| 1290 | a definition of the same variable. | 
|---|
| 1291 | @end table | 
|---|
| 1292 |  | 
|---|
| 1293 | The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings. | 
|---|
| 1294 | Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol | 
|---|
| 1295 | just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol | 
|---|
| 1296 | encountered with the same name.  One or both of the two symbols will be | 
|---|
| 1297 | a common symbol. | 
|---|
| 1298 |  | 
|---|
| 1299 | @enumerate | 
|---|
| 1300 | @item | 
|---|
| 1301 | Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a | 
|---|
| 1302 | definition for the symbol. | 
|---|
| 1303 | @smallexample | 
|---|
| 1304 | @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}' | 
|---|
| 1305 | overridden by definition | 
|---|
| 1306 | @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here | 
|---|
| 1307 | @end smallexample | 
|---|
| 1308 |  | 
|---|
| 1309 | @item | 
|---|
| 1310 | Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for | 
|---|
| 1311 | the symbol is encountered.  This is the same as the previous case, | 
|---|
| 1312 | except that the symbols are encountered in a different order. | 
|---|
| 1313 | @smallexample | 
|---|
| 1314 | @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}' | 
|---|
| 1315 | overriding common | 
|---|
| 1316 | @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here | 
|---|
| 1317 | @end smallexample | 
|---|
| 1318 |  | 
|---|
| 1319 | @item | 
|---|
| 1320 | Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol. | 
|---|
| 1321 | @smallexample | 
|---|
| 1322 | @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common | 
|---|
| 1323 | of `@var{symbol}' | 
|---|
| 1324 | @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here | 
|---|
| 1325 | @end smallexample | 
|---|
| 1326 |  | 
|---|
| 1327 | @item | 
|---|
| 1328 | Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol. | 
|---|
| 1329 | @smallexample | 
|---|
| 1330 | @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}' | 
|---|
| 1331 | overridden by larger common | 
|---|
| 1332 | @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here | 
|---|
| 1333 | @end smallexample | 
|---|
| 1334 |  | 
|---|
| 1335 | @item | 
|---|
| 1336 | Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol.  This is | 
|---|
| 1337 | the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are | 
|---|
| 1338 | encountered in a different order. | 
|---|
| 1339 | @smallexample | 
|---|
| 1340 | @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}' | 
|---|
| 1341 | overriding smaller common | 
|---|
| 1342 | @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here | 
|---|
| 1343 | @end smallexample | 
|---|
| 1344 | @end enumerate | 
|---|
| 1345 |  | 
|---|
| 1346 | @kindex --warn-constructors | 
|---|
| 1347 | @item --warn-constructors | 
|---|
| 1348 | Warn if any global constructors are used.  This is only useful for a few | 
|---|
| 1349 | object file formats.  For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not | 
|---|
| 1350 | detect the use of global constructors. | 
|---|
| 1351 |  | 
|---|
| 1352 | @kindex --warn-multiple-gp | 
|---|
| 1353 | @item --warn-multiple-gp | 
|---|
| 1354 | Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file. | 
|---|
| 1355 | This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha. | 
|---|
| 1356 | Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special | 
|---|
| 1357 | section.  A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle | 
|---|
| 1358 | of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a | 
|---|
| 1359 | base-register relative addressing mode.  Since the offset in | 
|---|
| 1360 | base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16 | 
|---|
| 1361 | bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool.  Thus, in | 
|---|
| 1362 | large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer | 
|---|
| 1363 | values in order to be able to address all possible constants.  This | 
|---|
| 1364 | option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs. | 
|---|
| 1365 |  | 
|---|
| 1366 | @kindex --warn-once | 
|---|
| 1367 | @cindex warnings, on undefined symbols | 
|---|
| 1368 | @cindex undefined symbols, warnings on | 
|---|
| 1369 | @item --warn-once | 
|---|
| 1370 | Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module | 
|---|
| 1371 | which refers to it. | 
|---|
| 1372 |  | 
|---|
| 1373 | @kindex --warn-section-align | 
|---|
| 1374 | @cindex warnings, on section alignment | 
|---|
| 1375 | @cindex section alignment, warnings on | 
|---|
| 1376 | @item --warn-section-align | 
|---|
| 1377 | Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of | 
|---|
| 1378 | alignment.  Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section. | 
|---|
| 1379 | The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that | 
|---|
| 1380 | is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for | 
|---|
| 1381 | the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}). | 
|---|
| 1382 |  | 
|---|
| 1383 | @kindex --whole-archive | 
|---|
| 1384 | @cindex including an entire archive | 
|---|
| 1385 | @item --whole-archive | 
|---|
| 1386 | For each archive mentioned on the command line after the | 
|---|
| 1387 | @code{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive | 
|---|
| 1388 | in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object | 
|---|
| 1389 | files.  This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared | 
|---|
| 1390 | library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared | 
|---|
| 1391 | library.  This option may be used more than once. | 
|---|
| 1392 |  | 
|---|
| 1393 | Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know | 
|---|
| 1394 | about this option, so you have to use @code{-Wl,-whole-archive}. | 
|---|
| 1395 | Second, don't forget to use @code{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your | 
|---|
| 1396 | list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to | 
|---|
| 1397 | your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well. | 
|---|
| 1398 |  | 
|---|
| 1399 | @kindex --wrap | 
|---|
| 1400 | @item --wrap @var{symbol} | 
|---|
| 1401 | Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}.  Any undefined reference to | 
|---|
| 1402 | @var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}.  Any | 
|---|
| 1403 | undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to | 
|---|
| 1404 | @var{symbol}. | 
|---|
| 1405 |  | 
|---|
| 1406 | This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function.  The | 
|---|
| 1407 | wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}.  If it | 
|---|
| 1408 | wishes to call the system function, it should call | 
|---|
| 1409 | @code{__real_@var{symbol}}. | 
|---|
| 1410 |  | 
|---|
| 1411 | Here is a trivial example: | 
|---|
| 1412 |  | 
|---|
| 1413 | @smallexample | 
|---|
| 1414 | void * | 
|---|
| 1415 | __wrap_malloc (int c) | 
|---|
| 1416 | @{ | 
|---|
| 1417 | printf ("malloc called with %ld\n", c); | 
|---|
| 1418 | return __real_malloc (c); | 
|---|
| 1419 | @} | 
|---|
| 1420 | @end smallexample | 
|---|
| 1421 |  | 
|---|
| 1422 | If you link other code with this file using @code{--wrap malloc}, then | 
|---|
| 1423 | all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc} | 
|---|
| 1424 | instead.  The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will | 
|---|
| 1425 | call the real @code{malloc} function. | 
|---|
| 1426 |  | 
|---|
| 1427 | You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that | 
|---|
| 1428 | links without the @code{--wrap} option will succeed.  If you do this, | 
|---|
| 1429 | you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same | 
|---|
| 1430 | file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the | 
|---|
| 1431 | call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}. | 
|---|
| 1432 |  | 
|---|
| 1433 | @kindex --enable-new-dtags | 
|---|
| 1434 | @kindex --disable-new-dtags | 
|---|
| 1435 | @item --enable-new-dtags | 
|---|
| 1436 | @itemx --disable-new-dtags | 
|---|
| 1437 | This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF | 
|---|
| 1438 | systems may not understand them. If you specify | 
|---|
| 1439 | @code{--enable-new-dtags}, the dynamic tags will be created as needed. | 
|---|
| 1440 | If you specify @code{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be | 
|---|
| 1441 | created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that | 
|---|
| 1442 | those options are only available for ELF systems. | 
|---|
| 1443 |  | 
|---|
| 1444 | @end table | 
|---|
| 1445 |  | 
|---|
| 1446 | @subsection Options specific to i386 PE targets | 
|---|
| 1447 |  | 
|---|
| 1448 | The i386 PE linker supports the @code{-shared} option, which causes | 
|---|
| 1449 | the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a | 
|---|
| 1450 | normal executable.  You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you | 
|---|
| 1451 | use this option.  In addition, the linker fully supports the standard | 
|---|
| 1452 | @code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line | 
|---|
| 1453 | like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports | 
|---|
| 1454 | symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal | 
|---|
| 1455 | object file). | 
|---|
| 1456 |  | 
|---|
| 1457 | In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker | 
|---|
| 1458 | support additional command line options that are specific to the i386 | 
|---|
| 1459 | PE target.  Options that take values may be separated from their | 
|---|
| 1460 | values by either a space or an equals sign. | 
|---|
| 1461 |  | 
|---|
| 1462 | @table @code | 
|---|
| 1463 |  | 
|---|
| 1464 | @kindex --add-stdcall-alias | 
|---|
| 1465 | @item --add-stdcall-alias | 
|---|
| 1466 | If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported | 
|---|
| 1467 | as-is and also with the suffix stripped. | 
|---|
| 1468 |  | 
|---|
| 1469 | @kindex --base-file | 
|---|
| 1470 | @item --base-file @var{file} | 
|---|
| 1471 | Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base | 
|---|
| 1472 | addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with | 
|---|
| 1473 | @file{dlltool}. | 
|---|
| 1474 |  | 
|---|
| 1475 | @kindex --dll | 
|---|
| 1476 | @item --dll | 
|---|
| 1477 | Create a DLL instead of a regular executable.  You may also use | 
|---|
| 1478 | @code{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def} | 
|---|
| 1479 | file. | 
|---|
| 1480 |  | 
|---|
| 1481 | @kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup | 
|---|
| 1482 | @kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup | 
|---|
| 1483 | @item --enable-stdcall-fixup | 
|---|
| 1484 | @itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup | 
|---|
| 1485 | If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to | 
|---|
| 1486 | do "fuzzy linking" by looking for another defined symbol that differs | 
|---|
| 1487 | only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will | 
|---|
| 1488 | resolve that symbol by linking to the match.  For example, the | 
|---|
| 1489 | undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function | 
|---|
| 1490 | @code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked | 
|---|
| 1491 | to the function @code{_bar}.  When the linker does this, it prints a | 
|---|
| 1492 | warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes | 
|---|
| 1493 | import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature | 
|---|
| 1494 | to be usable.  If you specify @code{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this | 
|---|
| 1495 | feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed.  If you specify | 
|---|
| 1496 | @code{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such | 
|---|
| 1497 | mismatches are considered to be errors. | 
|---|
| 1498 |  | 
|---|
| 1499 | @cindex DLLs, creating | 
|---|
| 1500 | @kindex --export-all-symbols | 
|---|
| 1501 | @item --export-all-symbols | 
|---|
| 1502 | If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will | 
|---|
| 1503 | be exported by the DLL.  Note that this is the default if there | 
|---|
| 1504 | otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols.  When symbols are | 
|---|
| 1505 | explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function | 
|---|
| 1506 | attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this | 
|---|
| 1507 | option is given.  Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12}, | 
|---|
| 1508 | @code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, and @code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically | 
|---|
| 1509 | exported. | 
|---|
| 1510 |  | 
|---|
| 1511 | @kindex --exclude-symbols | 
|---|
| 1512 | @item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},... | 
|---|
| 1513 | Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically | 
|---|
| 1514 | exported.  The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons. | 
|---|
| 1515 |  | 
|---|
| 1516 | @kindex --file-alignment | 
|---|
| 1517 | @item --file-alignment | 
|---|
| 1518 | Specify the file alignment.  Sections in the file will always begin at | 
|---|
| 1519 | file offsets which are multiples of this number.  This defaults to | 
|---|
| 1520 | 512. | 
|---|
| 1521 |  | 
|---|
| 1522 | @cindex heap size | 
|---|
| 1523 | @kindex --heap | 
|---|
| 1524 | @item --heap @var{reserve} | 
|---|
| 1525 | @itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit} | 
|---|
| 1526 | Specify the amount of memory to reserve (and optionally commit) to be | 
|---|
| 1527 | used as heap for this program.  The default is 1Mb reserved, 4K | 
|---|
| 1528 | committed. | 
|---|
| 1529 |  | 
|---|
| 1530 | @cindex image base | 
|---|
| 1531 | @kindex --image-base | 
|---|
| 1532 | @item --image-base @var{value} | 
|---|
| 1533 | Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll.  This is | 
|---|
| 1534 | the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll | 
|---|
| 1535 | is loaded.  To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of | 
|---|
| 1536 | your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any | 
|---|
| 1537 | other dlls.  The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000 | 
|---|
| 1538 | for dlls. | 
|---|
| 1539 |  | 
|---|
| 1540 | @kindex --kill-at | 
|---|
| 1541 | @item --kill-at | 
|---|
| 1542 | If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from | 
|---|
| 1543 | symbols before they are exported. | 
|---|
| 1544 |  | 
|---|
| 1545 | @kindex --major-image-version | 
|---|
| 1546 | @item --major-image-version @var{value} | 
|---|
| 1547 | Sets the major number of the "image version".  Defaults to 1. | 
|---|
| 1548 |  | 
|---|
| 1549 | @kindex --major-os-version | 
|---|
| 1550 | @item --major-os-version @var{value} | 
|---|
| 1551 | Sets the major number of the "os version".  Defaults to 4. | 
|---|
| 1552 |  | 
|---|
| 1553 | @kindex --major-subsystem-version | 
|---|
| 1554 | @item --major-subsystem-version @var{value} | 
|---|
| 1555 | Sets the major number of the "subsystem version".  Defaults to 4. | 
|---|
| 1556 |  | 
|---|
| 1557 | @kindex --minor-image-version | 
|---|
| 1558 | @item --minor-image-version @var{value} | 
|---|
| 1559 | Sets the minor number of the "image version".  Defaults to 0. | 
|---|
| 1560 |  | 
|---|
| 1561 | @kindex --minor-os-version | 
|---|
| 1562 | @item --minor-os-version @var{value} | 
|---|
| 1563 | Sets the minor number of the "os version".  Defaults to 0. | 
|---|
| 1564 |  | 
|---|
| 1565 | @kindex --minor-subsystem-version | 
|---|
| 1566 | @item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value} | 
|---|
| 1567 | Sets the minor number of the "subsystem version".  Defaults to 0. | 
|---|
| 1568 |  | 
|---|
| 1569 | @cindex DEF files, creating | 
|---|
| 1570 | @cindex DLLs, creating | 
|---|
| 1571 | @kindex --output-def | 
|---|
| 1572 | @item --output-def @var{file} | 
|---|
| 1573 | The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF | 
|---|
| 1574 | file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating.  This DEF file | 
|---|
| 1575 | (which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import | 
|---|
| 1576 | library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to | 
|---|
| 1577 | automatically or implicitly exported symbols. | 
|---|
| 1578 |  | 
|---|
| 1579 | @kindex --section-alignment | 
|---|
| 1580 | @item --section-alignment | 
|---|
| 1581 | Sets the section alignment.  Sections in memory will always begin at | 
|---|
| 1582 | addresses which are a multiple of this number.  Defaults to 0x1000. | 
|---|
| 1583 |  | 
|---|
| 1584 | @cindex stack size | 
|---|
| 1585 | @kindex --stack | 
|---|
| 1586 | @item --stack @var{reserve} | 
|---|
| 1587 | @itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit} | 
|---|
| 1588 | Specify the amount of memory to reserve (and optionally commit) to be | 
|---|
| 1589 | used as stack for this program.  The default is 32Mb reserved, 4K | 
|---|
| 1590 | committed. | 
|---|
| 1591 |  | 
|---|
| 1592 | @kindex --subsystem | 
|---|
| 1593 | @item --subsystem @var{which} | 
|---|
| 1594 | @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major} | 
|---|
| 1595 | @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor} | 
|---|
| 1596 | Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute.  The | 
|---|
| 1597 | legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows}, | 
|---|
| 1598 | @code{console}, and @code{posix}.  You may optionally set the | 
|---|
| 1599 | subsystem version also. | 
|---|
| 1600 |  | 
|---|
| 1601 | @end table | 
|---|
| 1602 |  | 
|---|
| 1603 | @ifset UsesEnvVars | 
|---|
| 1604 | @node Environment | 
|---|
| 1605 | @section Environment Variables | 
|---|
| 1606 |  | 
|---|
| 1607 | You can change the behavior of @code{ld} with the environment variables | 
|---|
| 1608 | @code{GNUTARGET}, @code{LDEMULATION}, and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}. | 
|---|
| 1609 |  | 
|---|
| 1610 | @kindex GNUTARGET | 
|---|
| 1611 | @cindex default input format | 
|---|
| 1612 | @code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't | 
|---|
| 1613 | use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}).  Its value should be one | 
|---|
| 1614 | of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}).  If there is no | 
|---|
| 1615 | @code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @code{ld} uses the natural format | 
|---|
| 1616 | of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD | 
|---|
| 1617 | attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files; | 
|---|
| 1618 | this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since | 
|---|
| 1619 | there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify | 
|---|
| 1620 | object-file formats is unique.  However, the configuration procedure for | 
|---|
| 1621 | BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first | 
|---|
| 1622 | in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention. | 
|---|
| 1623 |  | 
|---|
| 1624 | @kindex LDEMULATION | 
|---|
| 1625 | @cindex default emulation | 
|---|
| 1626 | @cindex emulation, default | 
|---|
| 1627 | @code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the | 
|---|
| 1628 | @samp{-m} option.  The emulation can affect various aspects of linker | 
|---|
| 1629 | behaviour, particularly the default linker script.  You can list the | 
|---|
| 1630 | available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.  If | 
|---|
| 1631 | the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment | 
|---|
| 1632 | variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the | 
|---|
| 1633 | linker was configured. | 
|---|
| 1634 | @end ifset | 
|---|
| 1635 |  | 
|---|
| 1636 | @kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE | 
|---|
| 1637 | @cindex demangling, default | 
|---|
| 1638 | Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols.  However, if | 
|---|
| 1639 | @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will | 
|---|
| 1640 | default to not demangling symbols.  This environment variable is used in | 
|---|
| 1641 | a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program.  The default | 
|---|
| 1642 | may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle} | 
|---|
| 1643 | options. | 
|---|
| 1644 |  | 
|---|
| 1645 | @node Scripts | 
|---|
| 1646 | @chapter Linker Scripts | 
|---|
| 1647 |  | 
|---|
| 1648 | @cindex scripts | 
|---|
| 1649 | @cindex linker scripts | 
|---|
| 1650 | @cindex command files | 
|---|
| 1651 | Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}.  This script is | 
|---|
| 1652 | written in the linker command language. | 
|---|
| 1653 |  | 
|---|
| 1654 | The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in | 
|---|
| 1655 | the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control | 
|---|
| 1656 | the memory layout of the output file.  Most linker scripts do nothing | 
|---|
| 1657 | more than this.  However, when necessary, the linker script can also | 
|---|
| 1658 | direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands | 
|---|
| 1659 | described below. | 
|---|
| 1660 |  | 
|---|
| 1661 | The linker always uses a linker script.  If you do not supply one | 
|---|
| 1662 | yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the | 
|---|
| 1663 | linker executable.  You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option | 
|---|
| 1664 | to display the default linker script.  Certain command line options, | 
|---|
| 1665 | such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script. | 
|---|
| 1666 |  | 
|---|
| 1667 | You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command | 
|---|
| 1668 | line option.  When you do this, your linker script will replace the | 
|---|
| 1669 | default linker script. | 
|---|
| 1670 |  | 
|---|
| 1671 | You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files | 
|---|
| 1672 | to the linker, as though they were files to be linked.  @xref{Implicit | 
|---|
| 1673 | Linker Scripts}. | 
|---|
| 1674 |  | 
|---|
| 1675 | @menu | 
|---|
| 1676 | * Basic Script Concepts::       Basic Linker Script Concepts | 
|---|
| 1677 | * Script Format::               Linker Script Format | 
|---|
| 1678 | * Simple Example::              Simple Linker Script Example | 
|---|
| 1679 | * Simple Commands::             Simple Linker Script Commands | 
|---|
| 1680 | * Assignments::                 Assigning Values to Symbols | 
|---|
| 1681 | * SECTIONS::                    SECTIONS Command | 
|---|
| 1682 | * MEMORY::                      MEMORY Command | 
|---|
| 1683 | * PHDRS::                       PHDRS Command | 
|---|
| 1684 | * VERSION::                     VERSION Command | 
|---|
| 1685 | * Expressions::                 Expressions in Linker Scripts | 
|---|
| 1686 | * Implicit Linker Scripts::     Implicit Linker Scripts | 
|---|
| 1687 | @end menu | 
|---|
| 1688 |  | 
|---|
| 1689 | @node Basic Script Concepts | 
|---|
| 1690 | @section Basic Linker Script Concepts | 
|---|
| 1691 | @cindex linker script concepts | 
|---|
| 1692 | We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to | 
|---|
| 1693 | describe the linker script language. | 
|---|
| 1694 |  | 
|---|
| 1695 | The linker combines input files into a single output file.  The output | 
|---|
| 1696 | file and each input file are in a special data format known as an | 
|---|
| 1697 | @dfn{object file format}.  Each file is called an @dfn{object file}. | 
|---|
| 1698 | The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our | 
|---|
| 1699 | purposes we will also call it an object file.  Each object file has, | 
|---|
| 1700 | among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}.  We sometimes refer to a | 
|---|
| 1701 | section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section | 
|---|
| 1702 | in the output file is an @dfn{output section}. | 
|---|
| 1703 |  | 
|---|
| 1704 | Each section in an object file has a name and a size.  Most sections | 
|---|
| 1705 | also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section | 
|---|
| 1706 | contents}.  A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which mean that | 
|---|
| 1707 | the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run. | 
|---|
| 1708 | A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an | 
|---|
| 1709 | area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be | 
|---|
| 1710 | loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out).  A section | 
|---|
| 1711 | which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort | 
|---|
| 1712 | of debugging information. | 
|---|
| 1713 |  | 
|---|
| 1714 | Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses.  The | 
|---|
| 1715 | first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address.  This is the address | 
|---|
| 1716 | the section will have when the output file is run.  The second is the | 
|---|
| 1717 | @dfn{LMA}, or load memory address.  This is the address at which the | 
|---|
| 1718 | section will be loaded.  In most cases the two addresses will be the | 
|---|
| 1719 | same.  An example of when they might be different is when a data section | 
|---|
| 1720 | is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up | 
|---|
| 1721 | (this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM | 
|---|
| 1722 | based system).  In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the | 
|---|
| 1723 | RAM address would be the VMA. | 
|---|
| 1724 |  | 
|---|
| 1725 | You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump} | 
|---|
| 1726 | program with the @samp{-h} option. | 
|---|
| 1727 |  | 
|---|
| 1728 | Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the | 
|---|
| 1729 | @dfn{symbol table}.  A symbol may be defined or undefined.  Each symbol | 
|---|
| 1730 | has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other | 
|---|
| 1731 | information.  If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you | 
|---|
| 1732 | will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or | 
|---|
| 1733 | static variable.  Every undefined function or global variable which is | 
|---|
| 1734 | referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol. | 
|---|
| 1735 |  | 
|---|
| 1736 | You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm} | 
|---|
| 1737 | program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t} | 
|---|
| 1738 | option. | 
|---|
| 1739 |  | 
|---|
| 1740 | @node Script Format | 
|---|
| 1741 | @section Linker Script Format | 
|---|
| 1742 | @cindex linker script format | 
|---|
| 1743 | Linker scripts are text files. | 
|---|
| 1744 |  | 
|---|
| 1745 | You write a linker script as a series of commands.  Each command is | 
|---|
| 1746 | either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a | 
|---|
| 1747 | symbol.  You may separate commands using semicolons.  Whitespace is | 
|---|
| 1748 | generally ignored. | 
|---|
| 1749 |  | 
|---|
| 1750 | Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly. | 
|---|
| 1751 | If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would | 
|---|
| 1752 | otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in | 
|---|
| 1753 | double quotes.  There is no way to use a double quote character in a | 
|---|
| 1754 | file name. | 
|---|
| 1755 |  | 
|---|
| 1756 | You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by | 
|---|
| 1757 | @samp{/*} and @samp{*/}.  As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent | 
|---|
| 1758 | to whitespace. | 
|---|
| 1759 |  | 
|---|
| 1760 | @node Simple Example | 
|---|
| 1761 | @section Simple Linker Script Example | 
|---|
| 1762 | @cindex linker script example | 
|---|
| 1763 | @cindex example of linker script | 
|---|
| 1764 | Many linker scripts are fairly simple. | 
|---|
| 1765 |  | 
|---|
| 1766 | The simplest possible linker script has just one command: | 
|---|
| 1767 | @samp{SECTIONS}.  You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the | 
|---|
| 1768 | memory layout of the output file. | 
|---|
| 1769 |  | 
|---|
| 1770 | The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command.  Here we will | 
|---|
| 1771 | describe a simple use of it.  Let's assume your program consists only of | 
|---|
| 1772 | code, initialized data, and uninitialized data.  These will be in the | 
|---|
| 1773 | @samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively. | 
|---|
| 1774 | Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in | 
|---|
| 1775 | your input files. | 
|---|
| 1776 |  | 
|---|
| 1777 | For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address | 
|---|
| 1778 | 0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000.  Here is a | 
|---|
| 1779 | linker script which will do that: | 
|---|
| 1780 | @smallexample | 
|---|
| 1781 | SECTIONS | 
|---|
| 1782 | @{ | 
|---|
| 1783 | . = 0x10000; | 
|---|
| 1784 | .text : @{ *(.text) @} | 
|---|
| 1785 | . = 0x8000000; | 
|---|
| 1786 | .data : @{ *(.data) @} | 
|---|
| 1787 | .bss : @{ *(.bss) @} | 
|---|
| 1788 | @} | 
|---|
| 1789 | @end smallexample | 
|---|
| 1790 |  | 
|---|
| 1791 | You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS}, | 
|---|
| 1792 | followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section | 
|---|
| 1793 | descriptions enclosed in curly braces. | 
|---|
| 1794 |  | 
|---|
| 1795 | The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example | 
|---|
| 1796 | sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location | 
|---|
| 1797 | counter.  If you do not specify the address of an output section in some | 
|---|
| 1798 | other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the | 
|---|
| 1799 | current value of the location counter.  The location counter is then | 
|---|
| 1800 | incremented by the size of the output section.  At the start of the | 
|---|
| 1801 | @samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}. | 
|---|
| 1802 |  | 
|---|
| 1803 | The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}.  The colon is | 
|---|
| 1804 | required syntax which may be ignored for now.  Within the curly braces | 
|---|
| 1805 | after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections | 
|---|
| 1806 | which should be placed into this output section.  The @samp{*} is a | 
|---|
| 1807 | wildcard which matches any file name.  The expression @samp{*(.text)} | 
|---|
| 1808 | means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files. | 
|---|
| 1809 |  | 
|---|
| 1810 | Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section | 
|---|
| 1811 | @samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the | 
|---|
| 1812 | @samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}. | 
|---|
| 1813 |  | 
|---|
| 1814 | The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in | 
|---|
| 1815 | the output file.  The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section | 
|---|
| 1816 | at address @samp{0x8000000}.  After the linker places the @samp{.data} | 
|---|
| 1817 | output section, the value of the location counter will be | 
|---|
| 1818 | @samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section.  The | 
|---|
| 1819 | effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section | 
|---|
| 1820 | immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory | 
|---|
| 1821 |  | 
|---|
| 1822 | The linker will ensure that each output section has the required | 
|---|
| 1823 | alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary.  In this | 
|---|
| 1824 | example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data} | 
|---|
| 1825 | sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker | 
|---|
| 1826 | may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} | 
|---|
| 1827 | sections. | 
|---|
| 1828 |  | 
|---|
| 1829 | That's it!  That's a simple and complete linker script. | 
|---|
| 1830 |  | 
|---|
| 1831 | @node Simple Commands | 
|---|
| 1832 | @section Simple Linker Script Commands | 
|---|
| 1833 | @cindex linker script simple commands | 
|---|
| 1834 | In this section we describe the simple linker script commands. | 
|---|
| 1835 |  | 
|---|
| 1836 | @menu | 
|---|
| 1837 | * Entry Point::                 Setting the entry point | 
|---|
| 1838 | * File Commands::               Commands dealing with files | 
|---|
| 1839 | @ifclear SingleFormat | 
|---|
| 1840 | * Format Commands::             Commands dealing with object file formats | 
|---|
| 1841 | @end ifclear | 
|---|
| 1842 |  | 
|---|
| 1843 | * Miscellaneous Commands::      Other linker script commands | 
|---|
| 1844 | @end menu | 
|---|
| 1845 |  | 
|---|
| 1846 | @node Entry Point | 
|---|
| 1847 | @subsection Setting the entry point | 
|---|
| 1848 | @kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol}) | 
|---|
| 1849 | @cindex start of execution | 
|---|
| 1850 | @cindex first instruction | 
|---|
| 1851 | @cindex entry point | 
|---|
| 1852 | The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry | 
|---|
| 1853 | point}.  You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the | 
|---|
| 1854 | entry point.  The argument is a symbol name: | 
|---|
| 1855 | @smallexample | 
|---|
| 1856 | ENTRY(@var{symbol}) | 
|---|
| 1857 | @end smallexample | 
|---|
| 1858 |  | 
|---|
| 1859 | There are several ways to set the entry point.  The linker will set the | 
|---|
| 1860 | entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and | 
|---|
| 1861 | stopping when one of them succeeds: | 
|---|
| 1862 | @itemize @bullet | 
|---|
| 1863 | @item | 
|---|
| 1864 | the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option; | 
|---|
| 1865 | @item | 
|---|
| 1866 | the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script; | 
|---|
| 1867 | @item | 
|---|
| 1868 | the value of the symbol @code{start}, if defined; | 
|---|
| 1869 | @item | 
|---|
| 1870 | the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present; | 
|---|
| 1871 | @item | 
|---|
| 1872 | The address @code{0}. | 
|---|
| 1873 | @end itemize | 
|---|
| 1874 |  | 
|---|
| 1875 | @node File Commands | 
|---|
| 1876 | @subsection Commands dealing with files | 
|---|
| 1877 | @cindex linker script file commands | 
|---|
| 1878 | Several linker script commands deal with files. | 
|---|
| 1879 |  | 
|---|
| 1880 | @table @code | 
|---|
| 1881 | @item INCLUDE @var{filename} | 
|---|
| 1882 | @kindex INCLUDE @var{filename} | 
|---|
| 1883 | @cindex including a linker script | 
|---|
| 1884 | Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point.  The file will | 
|---|
| 1885 | be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified | 
|---|
| 1886 | with the @code{-L} option.  You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to | 
|---|
| 1887 | 10 levels deep. | 
|---|
| 1888 |  | 
|---|
| 1889 | @item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{}) | 
|---|
| 1890 | @itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{}) | 
|---|
| 1891 | @kindex INPUT(@var{files}) | 
|---|
| 1892 | @cindex input files in linker scripts | 
|---|
| 1893 | @cindex input object files in linker scripts | 
|---|
| 1894 | @cindex linker script input object files | 
|---|
| 1895 | The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files | 
|---|
| 1896 | in the link, as though they were named on the command line. | 
|---|
| 1897 |  | 
|---|
| 1898 | For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do | 
|---|
| 1899 | a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line, | 
|---|
| 1900 | then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script. | 
|---|
| 1901 |  | 
|---|
| 1902 | In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker | 
|---|
| 1903 | script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option. | 
|---|
| 1904 |  | 
|---|
| 1905 | The linker will first try to open the file in the current directory.  If | 
|---|
| 1906 | it is not found, the linker will search through the archive library | 
|---|
| 1907 | search path.  See the description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command | 
|---|
| 1908 | Line Options}. | 
|---|
| 1909 |  | 
|---|
| 1910 | If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @code{ld} will transform the | 
|---|
| 1911 | name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument | 
|---|
| 1912 | @samp{-l}. | 
|---|
| 1913 |  | 
|---|
| 1914 | When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the | 
|---|
| 1915 | files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker | 
|---|
| 1916 | script file is included.  This can affect archive searching. | 
|---|
| 1917 |  | 
|---|
| 1918 | @item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{}) | 
|---|
| 1919 | @itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{}) | 
|---|
| 1920 | @kindex GROUP(@var{files}) | 
|---|
| 1921 | @cindex grouping input files | 
|---|
| 1922 | The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named | 
|---|
| 1923 | files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no | 
|---|
| 1924 | new undefined references are created.  See the description of @samp{-(} | 
|---|
| 1925 | in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}. | 
|---|
| 1926 |  | 
|---|
| 1927 | @item OUTPUT(@var{filename}) | 
|---|
| 1928 | @kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename}) | 
|---|
| 1929 | @cindex output file name in linker scripot | 
|---|
| 1930 | The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file.  Using | 
|---|
| 1931 | @code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using | 
|---|
| 1932 | @samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command | 
|---|
| 1933 | Line Options}).  If both are used, the command line option takes | 
|---|
| 1934 | precedence. | 
|---|
| 1935 |  | 
|---|
| 1936 | You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the | 
|---|
| 1937 | output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}. | 
|---|
| 1938 |  | 
|---|
| 1939 | @item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path}) | 
|---|
| 1940 | @kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path}) | 
|---|
| 1941 | @cindex library search path in linker script | 
|---|
| 1942 | @cindex archive search path in linker script | 
|---|
| 1943 | @cindex search path in linker script | 
|---|
| 1944 | The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where | 
|---|
| 1945 | @code{ld} looks for archive libraries.  Using | 
|---|
| 1946 | @code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}} | 
|---|
| 1947 | on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}).  If both | 
|---|
| 1948 | are used, then the linker will search both paths.  Paths specified using | 
|---|
| 1949 | the command line option are searched first. | 
|---|
| 1950 |  | 
|---|
| 1951 | @item STARTUP(@var{filename}) | 
|---|
| 1952 | @kindex STARTUP(@var{filename}) | 
|---|
| 1953 | @cindex first input file | 
|---|
| 1954 | The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except | 
|---|
| 1955 | that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as | 
|---|
| 1956 | though it were specified first on the command line.  This may be useful | 
|---|
| 1957 | when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the | 
|---|
| 1958 | first file. | 
|---|
| 1959 | @end table | 
|---|
| 1960 |  | 
|---|
| 1961 | @ifclear SingleFormat | 
|---|
| 1962 | @node Format Commands | 
|---|
| 1963 | @subsection Commands dealing with object file formats | 
|---|
| 1964 | A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats. | 
|---|
| 1965 |  | 
|---|
| 1966 | @table @code | 
|---|
| 1967 | @item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname}) | 
|---|
| 1968 | @itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little}) | 
|---|
| 1969 | @kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname}) | 
|---|
| 1970 | @cindex output file format in linker script | 
|---|
| 1971 | The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the | 
|---|
| 1972 | output file (@pxref{BFD}).  Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is | 
|---|
| 1973 | exactly like using @samp{-oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line | 
|---|
| 1974 | (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}).  If both are used, the command | 
|---|
| 1975 | line option takes precedence. | 
|---|
| 1976 |  | 
|---|
| 1977 | You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different | 
|---|
| 1978 | formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options. | 
|---|
| 1979 | This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the | 
|---|
| 1980 | desired endianness. | 
|---|
| 1981 |  | 
|---|
| 1982 | If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format | 
|---|
| 1983 | will be the first argument, @var{default}.  If @samp{-EB} is used, the | 
|---|
| 1984 | output format will be the second argument, @var{big}.  If @samp{-EL} is | 
|---|
| 1985 | used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}. | 
|---|
| 1986 |  | 
|---|
| 1987 | For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this | 
|---|
| 1988 | command: | 
|---|
| 1989 | @smallexample | 
|---|
| 1990 | OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips) | 
|---|
| 1991 | @end smallexample | 
|---|
| 1992 | This says that the default format for the output file is | 
|---|
| 1993 | @samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line | 
|---|
| 1994 | option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips} | 
|---|
| 1995 | format. | 
|---|
| 1996 |  | 
|---|
| 1997 | @item TARGET(@var{bfdname}) | 
|---|
| 1998 | @kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname}) | 
|---|
| 1999 | @cindex input file format in linker script | 
|---|
| 2000 | The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input | 
|---|
| 2001 | files.  It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands. | 
|---|
| 2002 | This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line | 
|---|
| 2003 | (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}).  If the @code{TARGET} command | 
|---|
| 2004 | is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET} | 
|---|
| 2005 | command is also used to set the format for the output file.  @xref{BFD}. | 
|---|
| 2006 | @end table | 
|---|
| 2007 | @end ifclear | 
|---|
| 2008 |  | 
|---|
| 2009 | @node Miscellaneous Commands | 
|---|
| 2010 | @subsection Other linker script commands | 
|---|
| 2011 | There are a few other linker scripts commands. | 
|---|
| 2012 |  | 
|---|
| 2013 | @table @code | 
|---|
| 2014 | @item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message}) | 
|---|
| 2015 | @kindex ASSERT | 
|---|
| 2016 | @cindex assertion in linker script | 
|---|
| 2017 | Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero.  If it is zero, then exit the linker | 
|---|
| 2018 | with an error code, and print @var{message}. | 
|---|
| 2019 |  | 
|---|
| 2020 | @item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{}) | 
|---|
| 2021 | @kindex EXTERN | 
|---|
| 2022 | @cindex undefined symbol in linker script | 
|---|
| 2023 | Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined | 
|---|
| 2024 | symbol.  Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional | 
|---|
| 2025 | modules from standard libraries.  You may list several @var{symbol}s for | 
|---|
| 2026 | each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times.  This | 
|---|
| 2027 | command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option. | 
|---|
| 2028 |  | 
|---|
| 2029 | @item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION | 
|---|
| 2030 | @kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION | 
|---|
| 2031 | @cindex common allocation in linker script | 
|---|
| 2032 | This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option: | 
|---|
| 2033 | to make @code{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable | 
|---|
| 2034 | output file is specified (@samp{-r}). | 
|---|
| 2035 |  | 
|---|
| 2036 | @item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{}) | 
|---|
| 2037 | @kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections}) | 
|---|
| 2038 | @cindex cross references | 
|---|
| 2039 | This command may be used to tell @code{ld} to issue an error about any | 
|---|
| 2040 | references among certain output sections. | 
|---|
| 2041 |  | 
|---|
| 2042 | In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when | 
|---|
| 2043 | using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section | 
|---|
| 2044 | will not be.  Any direct references between the two sections would be | 
|---|
| 2045 | errors.  For example, it would be an error if code in one section called | 
|---|
| 2046 | a function defined in the other section. | 
|---|
| 2047 |  | 
|---|
| 2048 | The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names.  If | 
|---|
| 2049 | @code{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports | 
|---|
| 2050 | an error and returns a non-zero exit status.  Note that the | 
|---|
| 2051 | @code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section | 
|---|
| 2052 | names. | 
|---|
| 2053 |  | 
|---|
| 2054 | @ifclear SingleFormat | 
|---|
| 2055 | @item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch}) | 
|---|
| 2056 | @kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch}) | 
|---|
| 2057 | @cindex machine architecture | 
|---|
| 2058 | @cindex architecture | 
|---|
| 2059 | Specify a particular output machine architecture.  The argument is one | 
|---|
| 2060 | of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}).  You can see the | 
|---|
| 2061 | architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with | 
|---|
| 2062 | the @samp{-f} option. | 
|---|
| 2063 | @end ifclear | 
|---|
| 2064 | @end table | 
|---|
| 2065 |  | 
|---|
| 2066 | @node Assignments | 
|---|
| 2067 | @section Assigning Values to Symbols | 
|---|
| 2068 | @cindex assignment in scripts | 
|---|
| 2069 | @cindex symbol definition, scripts | 
|---|
| 2070 | @cindex variables, defining | 
|---|
| 2071 | You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script.  This will define | 
|---|
| 2072 | the symbol as a global symbol. | 
|---|
| 2073 |  | 
|---|
| 2074 | @menu | 
|---|
| 2075 | * Simple Assignments::          Simple Assignments | 
|---|
| 2076 | * PROVIDE::                     PROVIDE | 
|---|
| 2077 | @end menu | 
|---|
| 2078 |  | 
|---|
| 2079 | @node Simple Assignments | 
|---|
| 2080 | @subsection Simple Assignments | 
|---|
| 2081 |  | 
|---|
| 2082 | You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators: | 
|---|
| 2083 |  | 
|---|
| 2084 | @table @code | 
|---|
| 2085 | @item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ; | 
|---|
| 2086 | @itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ; | 
|---|
| 2087 | @itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ; | 
|---|
| 2088 | @itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ; | 
|---|
| 2089 | @itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ; | 
|---|
| 2090 | @itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ; | 
|---|
| 2091 | @itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ; | 
|---|
| 2092 | @itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ; | 
|---|
| 2093 | @itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ; | 
|---|
| 2094 | @end table | 
|---|
| 2095 |  | 
|---|
| 2096 | The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of | 
|---|
| 2097 | @var{expression}.  In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be | 
|---|
| 2098 | defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly. | 
|---|
| 2099 |  | 
|---|
| 2100 | The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter.  You | 
|---|
| 2101 | may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. | 
|---|
| 2102 |  | 
|---|
| 2103 | The semicolon after @var{expression} is required. | 
|---|
| 2104 |  | 
|---|
| 2105 | Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}. | 
|---|
| 2106 |  | 
|---|
| 2107 | You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as | 
|---|
| 2108 | statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output | 
|---|
| 2109 | section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command. | 
|---|
| 2110 |  | 
|---|
| 2111 | The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the | 
|---|
| 2112 | expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}. | 
|---|
| 2113 |  | 
|---|
| 2114 | Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol | 
|---|
| 2115 | assignments may be used: | 
|---|
| 2116 |  | 
|---|
| 2117 | @smallexample | 
|---|
| 2118 | floating_point = 0; | 
|---|
| 2119 | SECTIONS | 
|---|
| 2120 | @{ | 
|---|
| 2121 | .text : | 
|---|
| 2122 | @{ | 
|---|
| 2123 | *(.text) | 
|---|
| 2124 | _etext = .; | 
|---|
| 2125 | @} | 
|---|
| 2126 | _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 4; | 
|---|
| 2127 | .data : @{ *(.data) @} | 
|---|
| 2128 | @} | 
|---|
| 2129 | @end smallexample | 
|---|
| 2130 | @noindent | 
|---|
| 2131 | In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as | 
|---|
| 2132 | zero.  The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following | 
|---|
| 2133 | the last @samp{.text} input section.  The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be | 
|---|
| 2134 | defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned | 
|---|
| 2135 | upward to a 4 byte boundary. | 
|---|
| 2136 |  | 
|---|
| 2137 | @node PROVIDE | 
|---|
| 2138 | @subsection PROVIDE | 
|---|
| 2139 | @cindex PROVIDE | 
|---|
| 2140 | In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol | 
|---|
| 2141 | only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in | 
|---|
| 2142 | the link.  For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol | 
|---|
| 2143 | @samp{etext}.  However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use | 
|---|
| 2144 | @samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error.  The | 
|---|
| 2145 | @code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as | 
|---|
| 2146 | @samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined.  The syntax is | 
|---|
| 2147 | @code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}. | 
|---|
| 2148 |  | 
|---|
| 2149 | Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}: | 
|---|
| 2150 | @smallexample | 
|---|
| 2151 | SECTIONS | 
|---|
| 2152 | @{ | 
|---|
| 2153 | .text : | 
|---|
| 2154 | @{ | 
|---|
| 2155 | *(.text) | 
|---|
| 2156 | _etext = .; | 
|---|
| 2157 | PROVIDE(etext = .); | 
|---|
| 2158 | @} | 
|---|
| 2159 | @} | 
|---|
| 2160 | @end smallexample | 
|---|
| 2161 |  | 
|---|
| 2162 | In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading | 
|---|
| 2163 | underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error.  If, on | 
|---|
| 2164 | the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading | 
|---|
| 2165 | underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program. | 
|---|
| 2166 | If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the | 
|---|
| 2167 | linker will use the definition in the linker script. | 
|---|
| 2168 |  | 
|---|
| 2169 | @node SECTIONS | 
|---|
| 2170 | @section SECTIONS command | 
|---|
| 2171 | @kindex SECTIONS | 
|---|
| 2172 | The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections | 
|---|
| 2173 | into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory. | 
|---|
| 2174 |  | 
|---|
| 2175 | The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is: | 
|---|
| 2176 | @smallexample | 
|---|
| 2177 | SECTIONS | 
|---|
| 2178 | @{ | 
|---|
| 2179 | @var{sections-command} | 
|---|
| 2180 | @var{sections-command} | 
|---|
| 2181 | @dots{} | 
|---|
| 2182 | @} | 
|---|
| 2183 | @end smallexample | 
|---|
| 2184 |  | 
|---|
| 2185 | Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following: | 
|---|
| 2186 |  | 
|---|
| 2187 | @itemize @bullet | 
|---|
| 2188 | @item | 
|---|
| 2189 | an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command}) | 
|---|
| 2190 | @item | 
|---|
| 2191 | a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments}) | 
|---|
| 2192 | @item | 
|---|
| 2193 | an output section description | 
|---|
| 2194 | @item | 
|---|
| 2195 | an overlay description | 
|---|
| 2196 | @end itemize | 
|---|
| 2197 |  | 
|---|
| 2198 | The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the | 
|---|
| 2199 | @code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in | 
|---|
| 2200 | those commands.  This can also make the linker script easier to | 
|---|
| 2201 | understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in | 
|---|
| 2202 | the layout of the output file. | 
|---|
| 2203 |  | 
|---|
| 2204 | Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described | 
|---|
| 2205 | below. | 
|---|
| 2206 |  | 
|---|
| 2207 | If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the | 
|---|
| 2208 | linker will place each input section into an identically named output | 
|---|
| 2209 | section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the | 
|---|
| 2210 | input files.  If all input sections are present in the first file, for | 
|---|
| 2211 | example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order | 
|---|
| 2212 | in the first input file.  The first section will be at address zero. | 
|---|
| 2213 |  | 
|---|
| 2214 | @menu | 
|---|
| 2215 | * Output Section Description::  Output section description | 
|---|
| 2216 | * Output Section Name::         Output section name | 
|---|
| 2217 | * Output Section Address::      Output section address | 
|---|
| 2218 | * Input Section::               Input section description | 
|---|
| 2219 | * Output Section Data::         Output section data | 
|---|
| 2220 | * Output Section Keywords::     Output section keywords | 
|---|
| 2221 | * Output Section Discarding::   Output section discarding | 
|---|
| 2222 | * Output Section Attributes::   Output section attributes | 
|---|
| 2223 | * Overlay Description::         Overlay description | 
|---|
| 2224 | @end menu | 
|---|
| 2225 |  | 
|---|
| 2226 | @node Output Section Description | 
|---|
| 2227 | @subsection Output section description | 
|---|
| 2228 | The full description of an output section looks like this: | 
|---|
| 2229 | @smallexample | 
|---|
| 2230 | @group | 
|---|
| 2231 | @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] : [AT(@var{lma})] | 
|---|
| 2232 | @{ | 
|---|
| 2233 | @var{output-section-command} | 
|---|
| 2234 | @var{output-section-command} | 
|---|
| 2235 | @dots{} | 
|---|
| 2236 | @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] | 
|---|
| 2237 | @end group | 
|---|
| 2238 | @end smallexample | 
|---|
| 2239 |  | 
|---|
| 2240 | Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes. | 
|---|
| 2241 |  | 
|---|
| 2242 | The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section | 
|---|
| 2243 | name is unambiguous.  The colon and the curly braces are also required. | 
|---|
| 2244 | The line breaks and other white space are optional. | 
|---|
| 2245 |  | 
|---|
| 2246 | Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following: | 
|---|
| 2247 |  | 
|---|
| 2248 | @itemize @bullet | 
|---|
| 2249 | @item | 
|---|
| 2250 | a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments}) | 
|---|
| 2251 | @item | 
|---|
| 2252 | an input section description (@pxref{Input Section}) | 
|---|
| 2253 | @item | 
|---|
| 2254 | data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data}) | 
|---|
| 2255 | @item | 
|---|
| 2256 | a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords}) | 
|---|
| 2257 | @end itemize | 
|---|
| 2258 |  | 
|---|
| 2259 | @node Output Section Name | 
|---|
| 2260 | @subsection Output section name | 
|---|
| 2261 | @cindex name, section | 
|---|
| 2262 | @cindex section name | 
|---|
| 2263 | The name of the output section is @var{section}.  @var{section} must | 
|---|
| 2264 | meet the constraints of your output format.  In formats which only | 
|---|
| 2265 | support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name | 
|---|
| 2266 | must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for | 
|---|
| 2267 | example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the | 
|---|
| 2268 | output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not | 
|---|
| 2269 | names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a | 
|---|
| 2270 | quoted numeric string.  A section name may consist of any sequence of | 
|---|
| 2271 | characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as | 
|---|
| 2272 | commas must be quoted. | 
|---|
| 2273 |  | 
|---|
| 2274 | The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section | 
|---|
| 2275 | Discarding}. | 
|---|
| 2276 |  | 
|---|
| 2277 | @node Output Section Address | 
|---|
| 2278 | @subsection Output section address | 
|---|
| 2279 | @cindex address, section | 
|---|
| 2280 | @cindex section address | 
|---|
| 2281 | The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory | 
|---|
| 2282 | address) of the output section.  If you do not provide @var{address}, | 
|---|
| 2283 | the linker will set it based on @var{region} if present, or otherwise | 
|---|
| 2284 | based on the current value of the location counter. | 
|---|
| 2285 |  | 
|---|
| 2286 | If you provide @var{address}, the address of the output section will be | 
|---|
| 2287 | set to precisely that.  If you provide neither @var{address} nor | 
|---|
| 2288 | @var{region}, then the address of the output section will be set to the | 
|---|
| 2289 | current value of the location counter aligned to the alignment | 
|---|
| 2290 | requirements of the output section.  The alignment requirement of the | 
|---|
| 2291 | output section is the strictest alignment of any input section contained | 
|---|
| 2292 | within the output section. | 
|---|
| 2293 |  | 
|---|
| 2294 | For example, | 
|---|
| 2295 | @smallexample | 
|---|
| 2296 | .text . : @{ *(.text) @} | 
|---|
| 2297 | @end smallexample | 
|---|
| 2298 | @noindent | 
|---|
| 2299 | and | 
|---|
| 2300 | @smallexample | 
|---|
| 2301 | .text : @{ *(.text) @} | 
|---|
| 2302 | @end smallexample | 
|---|
| 2303 | @noindent | 
|---|
| 2304 | are subtly different.  The first will set the address of the | 
|---|
| 2305 | @samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location | 
|---|
| 2306 | counter.  The second will set it to the current value of the location | 
|---|
| 2307 | counter aligned to the strictest alignment of a @samp{.text} input | 
|---|
| 2308 | section. | 
|---|
| 2309 |  | 
|---|
| 2310 | The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}. | 
|---|
| 2311 | For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary, | 
|---|
| 2312 | so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could | 
|---|
| 2313 | do something like this: | 
|---|
| 2314 | @smallexample | 
|---|
| 2315 | .text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @} | 
|---|
| 2316 | @end smallexample | 
|---|
| 2317 | @noindent | 
|---|
| 2318 | This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter | 
|---|
| 2319 | aligned upward to the specified value. | 
|---|
| 2320 |  | 
|---|
| 2321 | Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the | 
|---|
| 2322 | location counter. | 
|---|
| 2323 |  | 
|---|
| 2324 | @node Input Section | 
|---|
| 2325 | @subsection Input section description | 
|---|
| 2326 | @cindex input sections | 
|---|
| 2327 | @cindex mapping input sections to output sections | 
|---|
| 2328 | The most common output section command is an input section description. | 
|---|
| 2329 |  | 
|---|
| 2330 | The input section description is the most basic linker script operation. | 
|---|
| 2331 | You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program | 
|---|
| 2332 | in memory.  You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to | 
|---|
| 2333 | map the input files into your memory layout. | 
|---|
| 2334 |  | 
|---|
| 2335 | @menu | 
|---|
| 2336 | * Input Section Basics::        Input section basics | 
|---|
| 2337 | * Input Section Wildcards::     Input section wildcard patterns | 
|---|
| 2338 | * Input Section Common::        Input section for common symbols | 
|---|
| 2339 | * Input Section Keep::          Input section and garbage collection | 
|---|
| 2340 | * Input Section Example::       Input section example | 
|---|
| 2341 | @end menu | 
|---|
| 2342 |  | 
|---|
| 2343 | @node Input Section Basics | 
|---|
| 2344 | @subsubsection Input section basics | 
|---|
| 2345 | @cindex input section basics | 
|---|
| 2346 | An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed | 
|---|
| 2347 | by a list of section names in parentheses. | 
|---|
| 2348 |  | 
|---|
| 2349 | The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we | 
|---|
| 2350 | describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}). | 
|---|
| 2351 |  | 
|---|
| 2352 | The most common input section description is to include all input | 
|---|
| 2353 | sections with a particular name in the output section.  For example, to | 
|---|
| 2354 | include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write: | 
|---|
| 2355 | @smallexample | 
|---|
| 2356 | *(.text) | 
|---|
| 2357 | @end smallexample | 
|---|
| 2358 | @noindent | 
|---|
| 2359 | Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name.  To exclude a list | 
|---|
| 2360 | of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to | 
|---|
| 2361 | match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list.  For | 
|---|
| 2362 | example: | 
|---|
| 2363 | @smallexample | 
|---|
| 2364 | (*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)) | 
|---|
| 2365 | @end smallexample | 
|---|
| 2366 | will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and | 
|---|
| 2367 | @file{otherfile.o} to be included. | 
|---|
| 2368 |  | 
|---|
| 2369 | There are two ways to include more than one section: | 
|---|
| 2370 | @smallexample | 
|---|
| 2371 | *(.text .rdata) | 
|---|
| 2372 | *(.text) *(.rdata) | 
|---|
| 2373 | @end smallexample | 
|---|
| 2374 | @noindent | 
|---|
| 2375 | The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and | 
|---|
| 2376 | @samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section.  In the | 
|---|
| 2377 | first example, they will be intermingled.  In the second example, all | 
|---|
| 2378 | @samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all | 
|---|
| 2379 | @samp{.rdata} input sections. | 
|---|
| 2380 |  | 
|---|
| 2381 | You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file. | 
|---|
| 2382 | You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that | 
|---|
| 2383 | needs to be at a particular location in memory.  For example: | 
|---|
| 2384 | @smallexample | 
|---|
| 2385 | data.o(.data) | 
|---|
| 2386 | @end smallexample | 
|---|
| 2387 |  | 
|---|
| 2388 | If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in | 
|---|
| 2389 | the input file will be included in the output section.  This is not | 
|---|
| 2390 | commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion.  For example: | 
|---|
| 2391 | @smallexample | 
|---|
| 2392 | data.o | 
|---|
| 2393 | @end smallexample | 
|---|
| 2394 |  | 
|---|
| 2395 | When you use a file name which does not contain any wild card | 
|---|
| 2396 | characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file | 
|---|
| 2397 | name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command.  If you | 
|---|
| 2398 | did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as | 
|---|
| 2399 | though it appeared on the command line.  Note that this differs from an | 
|---|
| 2400 | @code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in | 
|---|
| 2401 | the archive search path. | 
|---|
| 2402 |  | 
|---|
| 2403 | @node Input Section Wildcards | 
|---|
| 2404 | @subsubsection Input section wildcard patterns | 
|---|
| 2405 | @cindex input section wildcards | 
|---|
| 2406 | @cindex wildcard file name patterns | 
|---|
| 2407 | @cindex file name wildcard patterns | 
|---|
| 2408 | @cindex section name wildcard patterns | 
|---|
| 2409 | In an input section description, either the file name or the section | 
|---|
| 2410 | name or both may be wildcard patterns. | 
|---|
| 2411 |  | 
|---|
| 2412 | The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard | 
|---|
| 2413 | pattern for the file name. | 
|---|
| 2414 |  | 
|---|
| 2415 | The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell. | 
|---|
| 2416 |  | 
|---|
| 2417 | @table @samp | 
|---|
| 2418 | @item * | 
|---|
| 2419 | matches any number of characters | 
|---|
| 2420 | @item ? | 
|---|
| 2421 | matches any single character | 
|---|
| 2422 | @item [@var{chars}] | 
|---|
| 2423 | matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-} | 
|---|
| 2424 | character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in | 
|---|
| 2425 | @samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter | 
|---|
| 2426 | @item \ | 
|---|
| 2427 | quotes the following character | 
|---|
| 2428 | @end table | 
|---|
| 2429 |  | 
|---|
| 2430 | When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters | 
|---|
| 2431 | will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on | 
|---|
| 2432 | Unix).  A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an | 
|---|
| 2433 | exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a | 
|---|
| 2434 | @samp{/} or not.  In a section name, the wildcard characters will match | 
|---|
| 2435 | a @samp{/} character. | 
|---|
| 2436 |  | 
|---|
| 2437 | File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly | 
|---|
| 2438 | specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command.  The linker | 
|---|
| 2439 | does not search directories to expand wildcards. | 
|---|
| 2440 |  | 
|---|
| 2441 | If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name | 
|---|
| 2442 | appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker | 
|---|
| 2443 | will use the first match in the linker script.  For example, this | 
|---|
| 2444 | sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the | 
|---|
| 2445 | @file{data.o} rule will not be used: | 
|---|
| 2446 | @smallexample | 
|---|
| 2447 | .data : @{ *(.data) @} | 
|---|
| 2448 | .data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @} | 
|---|
| 2449 | @end smallexample | 
|---|
| 2450 |  | 
|---|
| 2451 | @cindex SORT | 
|---|
| 2452 | Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards | 
|---|
| 2453 | in the order in which they are seen during the link.  You can change | 
|---|
| 2454 | this by using the @code{SORT} keyword, which appears before a wildcard | 
|---|
| 2455 | pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT(.text*)}).  When the | 
|---|
| 2456 | @code{SORT} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections | 
|---|
| 2457 | into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file. | 
|---|
| 2458 |  | 
|---|
| 2459 | If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the | 
|---|
| 2460 | @samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file.  The map file shows | 
|---|
| 2461 | precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections. | 
|---|
| 2462 |  | 
|---|
| 2463 | This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition | 
|---|
| 2464 | files.  This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text} | 
|---|
| 2465 | sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}. | 
|---|
| 2466 | The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning | 
|---|
| 2467 | with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the | 
|---|
| 2468 | linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}. | 
|---|
| 2469 | @smallexample | 
|---|
| 2470 | @group | 
|---|
| 2471 | SECTIONS @{ | 
|---|
| 2472 | .text : @{ *(.text) @} | 
|---|
| 2473 | .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @} | 
|---|
| 2474 | .data : @{ *(.data) @} | 
|---|
| 2475 | .bss : @{ *(.bss) @} | 
|---|
| 2476 | @} | 
|---|
| 2477 | @end group | 
|---|
| 2478 | @end smallexample | 
|---|
| 2479 |  | 
|---|
| 2480 | @node Input Section Common | 
|---|
| 2481 | @subsubsection Input section for common symbols | 
|---|
| 2482 | @cindex common symbol placement | 
|---|
| 2483 | @cindex uninitialized data placement | 
|---|
| 2484 | A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object | 
|---|
| 2485 | file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section.  The | 
|---|
| 2486 | linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section | 
|---|
| 2487 | named @samp{COMMON}. | 
|---|
| 2488 |  | 
|---|
| 2489 | You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any | 
|---|
| 2490 | other input sections.  You can use this to place common symbols from a | 
|---|
| 2491 | particular input file in one section while common symbols from other | 
|---|
| 2492 | input files are placed in another section. | 
|---|
| 2493 |  | 
|---|
| 2494 | In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the | 
|---|
| 2495 | @samp{.bss} section in the output file.  For example: | 
|---|
| 2496 | @smallexample | 
|---|
| 2497 | .bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @} | 
|---|
| 2498 | @end smallexample | 
|---|
| 2499 |  | 
|---|
| 2500 | @cindex scommon section | 
|---|
| 2501 | @cindex small common symbols | 
|---|
| 2502 | Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol.  For | 
|---|
| 2503 | example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common | 
|---|
| 2504 | symbols and small common symbols.  In this case, the linker will use a | 
|---|
| 2505 | different special section name for other types of common symbols.  In | 
|---|
| 2506 | the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common | 
|---|
| 2507 | symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols.  This permits you | 
|---|
| 2508 | to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different | 
|---|
| 2509 | locations. | 
|---|
| 2510 |  | 
|---|
| 2511 | @cindex [COMMON] | 
|---|
| 2512 | You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts.  This | 
|---|
| 2513 | notation is now considered obsolete.  It is equivalent to | 
|---|
| 2514 | @samp{*(COMMON)}. | 
|---|
| 2515 |  | 
|---|
| 2516 | @node Input Section Keep | 
|---|
| 2517 | @subsubsection Input section and garbage collection | 
|---|
| 2518 | @cindex KEEP | 
|---|
| 2519 | @cindex garbage collection | 
|---|
| 2520 | When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}), | 
|---|
| 2521 | it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated. | 
|---|
| 2522 | This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry | 
|---|
| 2523 | with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or | 
|---|
| 2524 | @code{KEEP(SORT(*)(.ctors))}. | 
|---|
| 2525 |  | 
|---|
| 2526 | @node Input Section Example | 
|---|
| 2527 | @subsubsection Input section example | 
|---|
| 2528 | The following example is a complete linker script.  It tells the linker | 
|---|
| 2529 | to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the | 
|---|
| 2530 | start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location | 
|---|
| 2531 | @samp{0x10000}.  All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o} | 
|---|
| 2532 | follows immediately, in the same output section.  All of section | 
|---|
| 2533 | @samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section | 
|---|
| 2534 | @samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}. | 
|---|
| 2535 | All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any | 
|---|
| 2536 | files are written to output section @samp{outputc}. | 
|---|
| 2537 |  | 
|---|
| 2538 | @smallexample | 
|---|
| 2539 | @group | 
|---|
| 2540 | SECTIONS @{ | 
|---|
| 2541 | outputa 0x10000 : | 
|---|
| 2542 | @{ | 
|---|
| 2543 | all.o | 
|---|
| 2544 | foo.o (.input1) | 
|---|
| 2545 | @} | 
|---|
| 2546 | outputb : | 
|---|
| 2547 | @{ | 
|---|
| 2548 | foo.o (.input2) | 
|---|
| 2549 | foo1.o (.input1) | 
|---|
| 2550 | @} | 
|---|
| 2551 | outputc : | 
|---|
| 2552 | @{ | 
|---|
| 2553 | *(.input1) | 
|---|
| 2554 | *(.input2) | 
|---|
| 2555 | @} | 
|---|
| 2556 | @} | 
|---|
| 2557 | @end group | 
|---|
| 2558 | @end smallexample | 
|---|
| 2559 |  | 
|---|
| 2560 | @node Output Section Data | 
|---|
| 2561 | @subsection Output section data | 
|---|
| 2562 | @cindex data | 
|---|
| 2563 | @cindex section data | 
|---|
| 2564 | @cindex output section data | 
|---|
| 2565 | @kindex BYTE(@var{expression}) | 
|---|
| 2566 | @kindex SHORT(@var{expression}) | 
|---|
| 2567 | @kindex LONG(@var{expression}) | 
|---|
| 2568 | @kindex QUAD(@var{expression}) | 
|---|
| 2569 | @kindex SQUAD(@var{expression}) | 
|---|
| 2570 | You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using | 
|---|
| 2571 | @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as | 
|---|
| 2572 | an output section command.  Each keyword is followed by an expression in | 
|---|
| 2573 | parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}).  The | 
|---|
| 2574 | value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location | 
|---|
| 2575 | counter. | 
|---|
| 2576 |  | 
|---|
| 2577 | The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands | 
|---|
| 2578 | store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively).  After storing the | 
|---|
| 2579 | bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes | 
|---|
| 2580 | stored. | 
|---|
| 2581 |  | 
|---|
| 2582 | For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value | 
|---|
| 2583 | of the symbol @samp{addr}: | 
|---|
| 2584 | @smallexample | 
|---|
| 2585 | BYTE(1) | 
|---|
| 2586 | LONG(addr) | 
|---|
| 2587 | @end smallexample | 
|---|
| 2588 |  | 
|---|
| 2589 | When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the | 
|---|
| 2590 | same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value.  When both host and | 
|---|
| 2591 | target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits.  In this case | 
|---|
| 2592 | @code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and | 
|---|
| 2593 | @code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits. | 
|---|
| 2594 |  | 
|---|
| 2595 | If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness, | 
|---|
| 2596 | which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness. | 
|---|
| 2597 | When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is | 
|---|
| 2598 | true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the | 
|---|
| 2599 | endianness of the first input object file. | 
|---|
| 2600 |  | 
|---|
| 2601 | Note - these commands only work inside a section description and not | 
|---|
| 2602 | between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker: | 
|---|
| 2603 | @smallexample | 
|---|
| 2604 | SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@ | 
|---|
| 2605 | @end smallexample | 
|---|
| 2606 | whereas this will work: | 
|---|
| 2607 | @smallexample | 
|---|
| 2608 | SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@ | 
|---|
| 2609 | @end smallexample | 
|---|
| 2610 |  | 
|---|
| 2611 | @kindex FILL(@var{expression}) | 
|---|
| 2612 | @cindex holes, filling | 
|---|
| 2613 | @cindex unspecified memory | 
|---|
| 2614 | You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the | 
|---|
| 2615 | current section.  It is followed by an expression in parentheses.  Any | 
|---|
| 2616 | otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example, | 
|---|
| 2617 | gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled | 
|---|
| 2618 | with the two least significant bytes of the expression, repeated as | 
|---|
| 2619 | necessary.  A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the | 
|---|
| 2620 | point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more | 
|---|
| 2621 | than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in | 
|---|
| 2622 | different parts of an output section. | 
|---|
| 2623 |  | 
|---|
| 2624 | This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the | 
|---|
| 2625 | value @samp{0x9090}: | 
|---|
| 2626 | @smallexample | 
|---|
| 2627 | FILL(0x9090) | 
|---|
| 2628 | @end smallexample | 
|---|
| 2629 |  | 
|---|
| 2630 | The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output | 
|---|
| 2631 | section attribute (@pxref{Output Section Fill}), but it only affects the | 
|---|
| 2632 | part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the | 
|---|
| 2633 | entire section.  If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes | 
|---|
| 2634 | precedence. | 
|---|
| 2635 |  | 
|---|
| 2636 | @node Output Section Keywords | 
|---|
| 2637 | @subsection Output section keywords | 
|---|
| 2638 | There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section | 
|---|
| 2639 | commands. | 
|---|
| 2640 |  | 
|---|
| 2641 | @table @code | 
|---|
| 2642 | @kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS | 
|---|
| 2643 | @cindex input filename symbols | 
|---|
| 2644 | @cindex filename symbols | 
|---|
| 2645 | @item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS | 
|---|
| 2646 | The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file. | 
|---|
| 2647 | The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input | 
|---|
| 2648 | file.  The section of each symbol will be the output section in which | 
|---|
| 2649 | the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears. | 
|---|
| 2650 |  | 
|---|
| 2651 | This is conventional for the a.out object file format.  It is not | 
|---|
| 2652 | normally used for any other object file format. | 
|---|
| 2653 |  | 
|---|
| 2654 | @kindex CONSTRUCTORS | 
|---|
| 2655 | @cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link | 
|---|
| 2656 | @cindex constructors, arranging in link | 
|---|
| 2657 | @item CONSTRUCTORS | 
|---|
| 2658 | When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an | 
|---|
| 2659 | unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and | 
|---|
| 2660 | destructors.  When linking object file formats which do not support | 
|---|
| 2661 | arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will | 
|---|
| 2662 | automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name. | 
|---|
| 2663 | For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the | 
|---|
| 2664 | linker to place constructor information in the output section where the | 
|---|
| 2665 | @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears.  The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is | 
|---|
| 2666 | ignored for other object file formats. | 
|---|
| 2667 |  | 
|---|
| 2668 | The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global | 
|---|
| 2669 | constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST}} marks the end.  The | 
|---|
| 2670 | first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address | 
|---|
| 2671 | of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word.  The | 
|---|
| 2672 | compiler must arrange to actually run the code.  For these object file | 
|---|
| 2673 | formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine | 
|---|
| 2674 | @code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into | 
|---|
| 2675 | the startup code for @code{main}.  @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs | 
|---|
| 2676 | destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function | 
|---|
| 2677 | @code{exit}. | 
|---|
| 2678 |  | 
|---|
| 2679 | For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support | 
|---|
| 2680 | arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the | 
|---|
| 2681 | addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors} | 
|---|
| 2682 | and @code{.dtors} sections.  Placing the following sequence into your | 
|---|
| 2683 | linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++ | 
|---|
| 2684 | runtime code expects to see. | 
|---|
| 2685 |  | 
|---|
| 2686 | @smallexample | 
|---|
| 2687 | __CTOR_LIST__ = .; | 
|---|
| 2688 | LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2) | 
|---|
| 2689 | *(.ctors) | 
|---|
| 2690 | LONG(0) | 
|---|
| 2691 | __CTOR_END__ = .; | 
|---|
| 2692 | __DTOR_LIST__ = .; | 
|---|
| 2693 | LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2) | 
|---|
| 2694 | *(.dtors) | 
|---|
| 2695 | LONG(0) | 
|---|
| 2696 | __DTOR_END__ = .; | 
|---|
| 2697 | @end smallexample | 
|---|
| 2698 |  | 
|---|
| 2699 | If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority, | 
|---|
| 2700 | which provides some control over the order in which global constructors | 
|---|
| 2701 | are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they | 
|---|
| 2702 | are executed in the correct order.  When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} | 
|---|
| 2703 | command, use @samp{SORT(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead.  When using the | 
|---|
| 2704 | @code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT(.ctors))} and | 
|---|
| 2705 | @samp{*(SORT(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and | 
|---|
| 2706 | @samp{*(.dtors)}. | 
|---|
| 2707 |  | 
|---|
| 2708 | Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically, | 
|---|
| 2709 | and you will not need to concern yourself with them.  However, you may | 
|---|
| 2710 | need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker | 
|---|
| 2711 | scripts. | 
|---|
| 2712 |  | 
|---|
| 2713 | @end table | 
|---|
| 2714 |  | 
|---|
| 2715 | @node Output Section Discarding | 
|---|
| 2716 | @subsection Output section discarding | 
|---|
| 2717 | @cindex discarding sections | 
|---|
| 2718 | @cindex sections, discarding | 
|---|
| 2719 | @cindex removing sections | 
|---|
| 2720 | The linker will not create output section which do not have any | 
|---|
| 2721 | contents.  This is for convenience when referring to input sections that | 
|---|
| 2722 | may or may not be present in any of the input files.  For example: | 
|---|
| 2723 | @smallexample | 
|---|
| 2724 | .foo @{ *(.foo) @} | 
|---|
| 2725 | @end smallexample | 
|---|
| 2726 | @noindent | 
|---|
| 2727 | will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a | 
|---|
| 2728 | @samp{.foo} section in at least one input file. | 
|---|
| 2729 |  | 
|---|
| 2730 | If you use anything other than an input section description as an output | 
|---|
| 2731 | section command, such as a symbol assignment, then the output section | 
|---|
| 2732 | will always be created, even if there are no matching input sections. | 
|---|
| 2733 |  | 
|---|
| 2734 | @cindex /DISCARD/ | 
|---|
| 2735 | The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard | 
|---|
| 2736 | input sections.  Any input sections which are assigned to an output | 
|---|
| 2737 | section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file. | 
|---|
| 2738 |  | 
|---|
| 2739 | @node Output Section Attributes | 
|---|
| 2740 | @subsection Output section attributes | 
|---|
| 2741 | @cindex output section attributes | 
|---|
| 2742 | We showed above that the full description of an output section looked | 
|---|
| 2743 | like this: | 
|---|
| 2744 | @smallexample | 
|---|
| 2745 | @group | 
|---|
| 2746 | @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] : [AT(@var{lma})] | 
|---|
| 2747 | @{ | 
|---|
| 2748 | @var{output-section-command} | 
|---|
| 2749 | @var{output-section-command} | 
|---|
| 2750 | @dots{} | 
|---|
| 2751 | @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] | 
|---|
| 2752 | @end group | 
|---|
| 2753 | @end smallexample | 
|---|
| 2754 | We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and | 
|---|
| 2755 | @var{output-section-command}.  In this section we will describe the | 
|---|
| 2756 | remaining section attributes. | 
|---|
| 2757 |  | 
|---|
| 2758 | @menu | 
|---|
| 2759 | * Output Section Type::         Output section type | 
|---|
| 2760 | * Output Section LMA::          Output section LMA | 
|---|
| 2761 | * Output Section Region::       Output section region | 
|---|
| 2762 | * Output Section Phdr::         Output section phdr | 
|---|
| 2763 | * Output Section Fill::         Output section fill | 
|---|
| 2764 | @end menu | 
|---|
| 2765 |  | 
|---|
| 2766 | @node Output Section Type | 
|---|
| 2767 | @subsubsection Output section type | 
|---|
| 2768 | Each output section may have a type.  The type is a keyword in | 
|---|
| 2769 | parentheses.  The following types are defined: | 
|---|
| 2770 |  | 
|---|
| 2771 | @table @code | 
|---|
| 2772 | @item NOLOAD | 
|---|
| 2773 | The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be | 
|---|
| 2774 | loaded into memory when the program is run. | 
|---|
| 2775 | @item DSECT | 
|---|
| 2776 | @itemx COPY | 
|---|
| 2777 | @itemx INFO | 
|---|
| 2778 | @itemx OVERLAY | 
|---|
| 2779 | These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are | 
|---|
| 2780 | rarely used.  They all have the same effect: the section should be | 
|---|
| 2781 | marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the | 
|---|
| 2782 | section when the program is run. | 
|---|
| 2783 | @end table | 
|---|
| 2784 |  | 
|---|
| 2785 | @kindex NOLOAD | 
|---|
| 2786 | @cindex prevent unnecessary loading | 
|---|
| 2787 | @cindex loading, preventing | 
|---|
| 2788 | The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on | 
|---|
| 2789 | the input sections which map into it.  You can override this by using | 
|---|
| 2790 | the section type.  For example, in the script sample below, the | 
|---|
| 2791 | @samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not | 
|---|
| 2792 | need to be loaded when the program is run.  The contents of the | 
|---|
| 2793 | @samp{ROM} section will appear in the linker output file as usual. | 
|---|
| 2794 | @smallexample | 
|---|
| 2795 | @group | 
|---|
| 2796 | SECTIONS @{ | 
|---|
| 2797 | ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @} | 
|---|
| 2798 | @dots{} | 
|---|
| 2799 | @} | 
|---|
| 2800 | @end group | 
|---|
| 2801 | @end smallexample | 
|---|
| 2802 |  | 
|---|
| 2803 | @node Output Section LMA | 
|---|
| 2804 | @subsubsection Output section LMA | 
|---|
| 2805 | @kindex AT>@var{lma_region} | 
|---|
| 2806 | @kindex AT(@var{lma}) | 
|---|
| 2807 | @cindex load address | 
|---|
| 2808 | @cindex section load address | 
|---|
| 2809 | Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see | 
|---|
| 2810 | @ref{Basic Script Concepts}.  The address expression which may appear in | 
|---|
| 2811 | an output section description sets the VMA (@pxref{Output Section | 
|---|
| 2812 | Address}). | 
|---|
| 2813 |  | 
|---|
| 2814 | The linker will normally set the LMA equal to the VMA.  You can change | 
|---|
| 2815 | that by using the @code{AT} keyword.  The expression @var{lma} that | 
|---|
| 2816 | follows the @code{AT} keyword specifies the load address of the | 
|---|
| 2817 | section.  Alternatively, with @samp{AT>@var{lma_region}} expression, | 
|---|
| 2818 | you may specify a memory region for the section's load address. @xref{MEMORY}. | 
|---|
| 2819 |  | 
|---|
| 2820 | @cindex ROM initialized data | 
|---|
| 2821 | @cindex initialized data in ROM | 
|---|
| 2822 | This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image.  For | 
|---|
| 2823 | example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one | 
|---|
| 2824 | called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called | 
|---|
| 2825 | @samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section | 
|---|
| 2826 | even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold | 
|---|
| 2827 | uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}.  The symbol @code{_data} is | 
|---|
| 2828 | defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location | 
|---|
| 2829 | counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value. | 
|---|
| 2830 |  | 
|---|
| 2831 | @smallexample | 
|---|
| 2832 | @group | 
|---|
| 2833 | SECTIONS | 
|---|
| 2834 | @{ | 
|---|
| 2835 | .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @} | 
|---|
| 2836 | .mdata 0x2000 : | 
|---|
| 2837 | AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) ) | 
|---|
| 2838 | @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ;  @} | 
|---|
| 2839 | .bss 0x3000 : | 
|---|
| 2840 | @{ _bstart = . ;  *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@} | 
|---|
| 2841 | @} | 
|---|
| 2842 | @end group | 
|---|
| 2843 | @end smallexample | 
|---|
| 2844 |  | 
|---|
| 2845 | The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with | 
|---|
| 2846 | this linker script would include something like the following, to copy | 
|---|
| 2847 | the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address.  Notice | 
|---|
| 2848 | how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker | 
|---|
| 2849 | script. | 
|---|
| 2850 |  | 
|---|
| 2851 | @smallexample | 
|---|
| 2852 | @group | 
|---|
| 2853 | extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend; | 
|---|
| 2854 | char *src = &_etext; | 
|---|
| 2855 | char *dst = &_data; | 
|---|
| 2856 |  | 
|---|
| 2857 | /* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */ | 
|---|
| 2858 | while (dst < &_edata) @{ | 
|---|
| 2859 | *dst++ = *src++; | 
|---|
| 2860 | @} | 
|---|
| 2861 |  | 
|---|
| 2862 | /* Zero bss */ | 
|---|
| 2863 | for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++) | 
|---|
| 2864 | *dst = 0; | 
|---|
| 2865 | @end group | 
|---|
| 2866 | @end smallexample | 
|---|
| 2867 |  | 
|---|
| 2868 | @node Output Section Region | 
|---|
| 2869 | @subsubsection Output section region | 
|---|
| 2870 | @kindex >@var{region} | 
|---|
| 2871 | @cindex section, assigning to memory region | 
|---|
| 2872 | @cindex memory regions and sections | 
|---|
| 2873 | You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by | 
|---|
| 2874 | using @samp{>@var{region}}.  @xref{MEMORY}. | 
|---|
| 2875 |  | 
|---|
| 2876 | Here is a simple example: | 
|---|
| 2877 | @smallexample | 
|---|
| 2878 | @group | 
|---|
| 2879 | MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @} | 
|---|
| 2880 | SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @} | 
|---|
| 2881 | @end group | 
|---|
| 2882 | @end smallexample | 
|---|
| 2883 |  | 
|---|
| 2884 | @node Output Section Phdr | 
|---|
| 2885 | @subsubsection Output section phdr | 
|---|
| 2886 | @kindex :@var{phdr} | 
|---|
| 2887 | @cindex section, assigning to program header | 
|---|
| 2888 | @cindex program headers and sections | 
|---|
| 2889 | You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by | 
|---|
| 2890 | using @samp{:@var{phdr}}.  @xref{PHDRS}.  If a section is assigned to | 
|---|
| 2891 | one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be | 
|---|
| 2892 | assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly | 
|---|
| 2893 | @code{:@var{phdr}} modifier.  You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the | 
|---|
| 2894 | linker to not put the section in any segment at all. | 
|---|
| 2895 |  | 
|---|
| 2896 | Here is a simple example: | 
|---|
| 2897 | @smallexample | 
|---|
| 2898 | @group | 
|---|
| 2899 | PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @} | 
|---|
| 2900 | SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @} | 
|---|
| 2901 | @end group | 
|---|
| 2902 | @end smallexample | 
|---|
| 2903 |  | 
|---|
| 2904 | @node Output Section Fill | 
|---|
| 2905 | @subsubsection Output section fill | 
|---|
| 2906 | @kindex =@var{fillexp} | 
|---|
| 2907 | @cindex section fill pattern | 
|---|
| 2908 | @cindex fill pattern, entire section | 
|---|
| 2909 | You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using | 
|---|
| 2910 | @samp{=@var{fillexp}}.  @var{fillexp} is an expression | 
|---|
| 2911 | (@pxref{Expressions}).  Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory | 
|---|
| 2912 | within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required | 
|---|
| 2913 | alignment of input sections) will be filled with the two least | 
|---|
| 2914 | significant bytes of the value, repeated as necessary. | 
|---|
| 2915 |  | 
|---|
| 2916 | You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the | 
|---|
| 2917 | output section commands; see @ref{Output Section Data}. | 
|---|
| 2918 |  | 
|---|
| 2919 | Here is a simple example: | 
|---|
| 2920 | @smallexample | 
|---|
| 2921 | @group | 
|---|
| 2922 | SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x9090 @} | 
|---|
| 2923 | @end group | 
|---|
| 2924 | @end smallexample | 
|---|
| 2925 |  | 
|---|
| 2926 | @node Overlay Description | 
|---|
| 2927 | @subsection Overlay description | 
|---|
| 2928 | @kindex OVERLAY | 
|---|
| 2929 | @cindex overlays | 
|---|
| 2930 | An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which | 
|---|
| 2931 | are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at | 
|---|
| 2932 | the same memory address.  At run time, some sort of overlay manager will | 
|---|
| 2933 | copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as | 
|---|
| 2934 | required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits.  This approach | 
|---|
| 2935 | can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster | 
|---|
| 2936 | than another. | 
|---|
| 2937 |  | 
|---|
| 2938 | Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command.  The | 
|---|
| 2939 | @code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an | 
|---|
| 2940 | output section description.  The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY} | 
|---|
| 2941 | command is as follows: | 
|---|
| 2942 | @smallexample | 
|---|
| 2943 | @group | 
|---|
| 2944 | OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )] | 
|---|
| 2945 | @{ | 
|---|
| 2946 | @var{secname1} | 
|---|
| 2947 | @{ | 
|---|
| 2948 | @var{output-section-command} | 
|---|
| 2949 | @var{output-section-command} | 
|---|
| 2950 | @dots{} | 
|---|
| 2951 | @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] | 
|---|
| 2952 | @var{secname2} | 
|---|
| 2953 | @{ | 
|---|
| 2954 | @var{output-section-command} | 
|---|
| 2955 | @var{output-section-command} | 
|---|
| 2956 | @dots{} | 
|---|
| 2957 | @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] | 
|---|
| 2958 | @dots{} | 
|---|
| 2959 | @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] | 
|---|
| 2960 | @end group | 
|---|
| 2961 | @end smallexample | 
|---|
| 2962 |  | 
|---|
| 2963 | Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each | 
|---|
| 2964 | section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above).  The | 
|---|
| 2965 | section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to | 
|---|
| 2966 | those within the general @code{SECTIONS} contruct (@pxref{SECTIONS}), | 
|---|
| 2967 | except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for | 
|---|
| 2968 | sections within an @code{OVERLAY}. | 
|---|
| 2969 |  | 
|---|
| 2970 | The sections are all defined with the same starting address.  The load | 
|---|
| 2971 | addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in | 
|---|
| 2972 | memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a | 
|---|
| 2973 | whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional, | 
|---|
| 2974 | and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional, | 
|---|
| 2975 | and defaults to the current value of the location counter). | 
|---|
| 2976 |  | 
|---|
| 2977 | If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there any references | 
|---|
| 2978 | among the sections, the linker will report an error.  Since the sections | 
|---|
| 2979 | all run at the same address, it normally does not make sense for one | 
|---|
| 2980 | section to refer directly to another.  @xref{Miscellaneous Commands, | 
|---|
| 2981 | NOCROSSREFS}. | 
|---|
| 2982 |  | 
|---|
| 2983 | For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically | 
|---|
| 2984 | defines two symbols.  The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is | 
|---|
| 2985 | defined as the starting load address of the section.  The symbol | 
|---|
| 2986 | @code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of | 
|---|
| 2987 | the section.  Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal | 
|---|
| 2988 | within C identifiers are removed.  C (or assembler) code may use these | 
|---|
| 2989 | symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary. | 
|---|
| 2990 |  | 
|---|
| 2991 | At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to | 
|---|
| 2992 | the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section. | 
|---|
| 2993 |  | 
|---|
| 2994 | Here is an example.  Remember that this would appear inside a | 
|---|
| 2995 | @code{SECTIONS} construct. | 
|---|
| 2996 | @smallexample | 
|---|
| 2997 | @group | 
|---|
| 2998 | OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) | 
|---|
| 2999 | @{ | 
|---|
| 3000 | .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @} | 
|---|
| 3001 | .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @} | 
|---|
| 3002 | @} | 
|---|
| 3003 | @end group | 
|---|
| 3004 | @end smallexample | 
|---|
| 3005 | @noindent | 
|---|
| 3006 | This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at | 
|---|
| 3007 | address 0x1000.  @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and | 
|---|
| 3008 | @samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}.  The | 
|---|
| 3009 | following symbols will be defined: @code{__load_start_text0}, | 
|---|
| 3010 | @code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1}, | 
|---|
| 3011 | @code{__load_stop_text1}. | 
|---|
| 3012 |  | 
|---|
| 3013 | C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look | 
|---|
| 3014 | like the following. | 
|---|
| 3015 |  | 
|---|
| 3016 | @smallexample | 
|---|
| 3017 | @group | 
|---|
| 3018 | extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1; | 
|---|
| 3019 | memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1, | 
|---|
| 3020 | &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1); | 
|---|
| 3021 | @end group | 
|---|
| 3022 | @end smallexample | 
|---|
| 3023 |  | 
|---|
| 3024 | Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since | 
|---|
| 3025 | everything it does can be done using the more basic commands.  The above | 
|---|
| 3026 | example could have been written identically as follows. | 
|---|
| 3027 |  | 
|---|
| 3028 | @smallexample | 
|---|
| 3029 | @group | 
|---|
| 3030 | .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @} | 
|---|
| 3031 | __load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0); | 
|---|
| 3032 | __load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0); | 
|---|
| 3033 | .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @} | 
|---|
| 3034 | __load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1); | 
|---|
| 3035 | __load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1); | 
|---|
| 3036 | . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1)); | 
|---|
| 3037 | @end group | 
|---|
| 3038 | @end smallexample | 
|---|
| 3039 |  | 
|---|
| 3040 | @node MEMORY | 
|---|
| 3041 | @section MEMORY command | 
|---|
| 3042 | @kindex MEMORY | 
|---|
| 3043 | @cindex memory regions | 
|---|
| 3044 | @cindex regions of memory | 
|---|
| 3045 | @cindex allocating memory | 
|---|
| 3046 | @cindex discontinuous memory | 
|---|
| 3047 | The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available | 
|---|
| 3048 | memory.  You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command. | 
|---|
| 3049 |  | 
|---|
| 3050 | The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of | 
|---|
| 3051 | memory in the target.  You can use it to describe which memory regions | 
|---|
| 3052 | may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid.  You | 
|---|
| 3053 | can then assign sections to particular memory regions.  The linker will | 
|---|
| 3054 | set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about | 
|---|
| 3055 | regions that become too full.  The linker will not shuffle sections | 
|---|
| 3056 | around to fit into the available regions. | 
|---|
| 3057 |  | 
|---|
| 3058 | A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY} | 
|---|
| 3059 | command.  However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as | 
|---|
| 3060 | you wish.  The syntax is: | 
|---|
| 3061 | @smallexample | 
|---|
| 3062 | @group | 
|---|
| 3063 | MEMORY | 
|---|
| 3064 | @{ | 
|---|
| 3065 | @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len} | 
|---|
| 3066 | @dots{} | 
|---|
| 3067 | @} | 
|---|
| 3068 | @end group | 
|---|
| 3069 | @end smallexample | 
|---|
| 3070 |  | 
|---|
| 3071 | The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the | 
|---|
| 3072 | region.  The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script. | 
|---|
| 3073 | Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict | 
|---|
| 3074 | with symbol names, file names, or section names.  Each memory region | 
|---|
| 3075 | must have a distinct name. | 
|---|
| 3076 |  | 
|---|
| 3077 | @cindex memory region attributes | 
|---|
| 3078 | The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify | 
|---|
| 3079 | whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is | 
|---|
| 3080 | not explicitly mapped in the linker script.  As described in | 
|---|
| 3081 | @ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input | 
|---|
| 3082 | section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as | 
|---|
| 3083 | the input section.  If you define region attributes, the linker will use | 
|---|
| 3084 | them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates. | 
|---|
| 3085 |  | 
|---|
| 3086 | The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters: | 
|---|
| 3087 | @table @samp | 
|---|
| 3088 | @item R | 
|---|
| 3089 | Read-only section | 
|---|
| 3090 | @item W | 
|---|
| 3091 | Read/write section | 
|---|
| 3092 | @item X | 
|---|
| 3093 | Executable section | 
|---|
| 3094 | @item A | 
|---|
| 3095 | Allocatable section | 
|---|
| 3096 | @item I | 
|---|
| 3097 | Initialized section | 
|---|
| 3098 | @item L | 
|---|
| 3099 | Same as @samp{I} | 
|---|
| 3100 | @item ! | 
|---|
| 3101 | Invert the sense of any of the preceding attributes | 
|---|
| 3102 | @end table | 
|---|
| 3103 |  | 
|---|
| 3104 | If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than | 
|---|
| 3105 | @samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region.  The @samp{!} | 
|---|
| 3106 | attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed | 
|---|
| 3107 | in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed | 
|---|
| 3108 | attributes. | 
|---|
| 3109 |  | 
|---|
| 3110 | @kindex ORIGIN = | 
|---|
| 3111 | @kindex o = | 
|---|
| 3112 | @kindex org = | 
|---|
| 3113 | The @var{origin} is an expression for the start address of the memory | 
|---|
| 3114 | region.  The expression must evaluate to a constant before memory | 
|---|
| 3115 | allocation is performed, which means that you may not use any section | 
|---|
| 3116 | relative symbols.  The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be abbreviated to | 
|---|
| 3117 | @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example, @code{ORG}). | 
|---|
| 3118 |  | 
|---|
| 3119 | @kindex LENGTH = | 
|---|
| 3120 | @kindex len = | 
|---|
| 3121 | @kindex l = | 
|---|
| 3122 | The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory | 
|---|
| 3123 | region.  As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must | 
|---|
| 3124 | evaluate to a constant before memory allocation is performed.  The | 
|---|
| 3125 | keyword @code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}. | 
|---|
| 3126 |  | 
|---|
| 3127 | In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions | 
|---|
| 3128 | available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes, | 
|---|
| 3129 | and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes.  The | 
|---|
| 3130 | linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which | 
|---|
| 3131 | is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only | 
|---|
| 3132 | or executable.  The linker will place other sections which are not | 
|---|
| 3133 | explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory | 
|---|
| 3134 | region. | 
|---|
| 3135 |  | 
|---|
| 3136 | @smallexample | 
|---|
| 3137 | @group | 
|---|
| 3138 | MEMORY | 
|---|
| 3139 | @{ | 
|---|
| 3140 | rom (rx)  : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K | 
|---|
| 3141 | ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M | 
|---|
| 3142 | @} | 
|---|
| 3143 | @end group | 
|---|
| 3144 | @end smallexample | 
|---|
| 3145 |  | 
|---|
| 3146 | Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place | 
|---|
| 3147 | specific output sections into that memory region by using the | 
|---|
| 3148 | @samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute.  For example, if you have | 
|---|
| 3149 | a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the | 
|---|
| 3150 | output section definition.  @xref{Output Section Region}.  If no address | 
|---|
| 3151 | was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to | 
|---|
| 3152 | the next available address within the memory region.  If the combined | 
|---|
| 3153 | output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the | 
|---|
| 3154 | region, the linker will issue an error message. | 
|---|
| 3155 |  | 
|---|
| 3156 | @node PHDRS | 
|---|
| 3157 | @section PHDRS Command | 
|---|
| 3158 | @kindex PHDRS | 
|---|
| 3159 | @cindex program headers | 
|---|
| 3160 | @cindex ELF program headers | 
|---|
| 3161 | @cindex program segments | 
|---|
| 3162 | @cindex segments, ELF | 
|---|
| 3163 | The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as | 
|---|
| 3164 | @dfn{segments}.  The program headers describe how the program should be | 
|---|
| 3165 | loaded into memory.  You can print them out by using the @code{objdump} | 
|---|
| 3166 | program with the @samp{-p} option. | 
|---|
| 3167 |  | 
|---|
| 3168 | When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader | 
|---|
| 3169 | reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the | 
|---|
| 3170 | program.  This will only work if the program headers are set correctly. | 
|---|
| 3171 | This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader | 
|---|
| 3172 | interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI. | 
|---|
| 3173 |  | 
|---|
| 3174 | The linker will create reasonable program headers by default.  However, | 
|---|
| 3175 | in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more | 
|---|
| 3176 | precisely.  You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose.  When | 
|---|
| 3177 | the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will | 
|---|
| 3178 | not create any program headers other than the ones specified. | 
|---|
| 3179 |  | 
|---|
| 3180 | The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when | 
|---|
| 3181 | generating an ELF output file.  In other cases, the linker will simply | 
|---|
| 3182 | ignore @code{PHDRS}. | 
|---|
| 3183 |  | 
|---|
| 3184 | This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command.  The words @code{PHDRS}, | 
|---|
| 3185 | @code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords. | 
|---|
| 3186 |  | 
|---|
| 3187 | @smallexample | 
|---|
| 3188 | @group | 
|---|
| 3189 | PHDRS | 
|---|
| 3190 | @{ | 
|---|
| 3191 | @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ] | 
|---|
| 3192 | [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ; | 
|---|
| 3193 | @} | 
|---|
| 3194 | @end group | 
|---|
| 3195 | @end smallexample | 
|---|
| 3196 |  | 
|---|
| 3197 | The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command | 
|---|
| 3198 | of the linker script.  It is not put into the output file.  Program | 
|---|
| 3199 | header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict | 
|---|
| 3200 | with symbol names, file names, or section names.  Each program header | 
|---|
| 3201 | must have a distinct name. | 
|---|
| 3202 |  | 
|---|
| 3203 | Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the | 
|---|
| 3204 | system loader will load from the file.  In the linker script, you | 
|---|
| 3205 | specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output | 
|---|
| 3206 | sections in the segments.  You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section | 
|---|
| 3207 | attribute to place a section in a particular segment.  @xref{Output | 
|---|
| 3208 | Section Phdr}. | 
|---|
| 3209 |  | 
|---|
| 3210 | It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment.  This | 
|---|
| 3211 | merely implies that one segment of memory contains another.  You may | 
|---|
| 3212 | repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should | 
|---|
| 3213 | contain the section. | 
|---|
| 3214 |  | 
|---|
| 3215 | If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}}, | 
|---|
| 3216 | then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do | 
|---|
| 3217 | not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments.  This is for | 
|---|
| 3218 | convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be | 
|---|
| 3219 | placed in a single segment.  You can use @code{:NONE} to override the | 
|---|
| 3220 | default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any | 
|---|
| 3221 | segment at all. | 
|---|
| 3222 |  | 
|---|
| 3223 | @kindex FILEHDR | 
|---|
| 3224 | @kindex PHDRS | 
|---|
| 3225 | You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords appear after | 
|---|
| 3226 | the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment. | 
|---|
| 3227 | The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF | 
|---|
| 3228 | file header.  The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should | 
|---|
| 3229 | include the ELF program headers themselves. | 
|---|
| 3230 |  | 
|---|
| 3231 | The @var{type} may be one of the following.  The numbers indicate the | 
|---|
| 3232 | value of the keyword. | 
|---|
| 3233 |  | 
|---|
| 3234 | @table @asis | 
|---|
| 3235 | @item @code{PT_NULL} (0) | 
|---|
| 3236 | Indicates an unused program header. | 
|---|
| 3237 |  | 
|---|
| 3238 | @item @code{PT_LOAD} (1) | 
|---|
| 3239 | Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from | 
|---|
| 3240 | the file. | 
|---|
| 3241 |  | 
|---|
| 3242 | @item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2) | 
|---|
| 3243 | Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found. | 
|---|
| 3244 |  | 
|---|
| 3245 | @item @code{PT_INTERP} (3) | 
|---|
| 3246 | Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be | 
|---|
| 3247 | found. | 
|---|
| 3248 |  | 
|---|
| 3249 | @item @code{PT_NOTE} (4) | 
|---|
| 3250 | Indicates a segment holding note information. | 
|---|
| 3251 |  | 
|---|
| 3252 | @item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5) | 
|---|
| 3253 | A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF | 
|---|
| 3254 | ABI. | 
|---|
| 3255 |  | 
|---|
| 3256 | @item @code{PT_PHDR} (6) | 
|---|
| 3257 | Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found. | 
|---|
| 3258 |  | 
|---|
| 3259 | @item @var{expression} | 
|---|
| 3260 | An expression giving the numeric type of the program header.  This may | 
|---|
| 3261 | be used for types not defined above. | 
|---|
| 3262 | @end table | 
|---|
| 3263 |  | 
|---|
| 3264 | You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address | 
|---|
| 3265 | in memory by using an @code{AT} expression.  This is identical to the | 
|---|
| 3266 | @code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output | 
|---|
| 3267 | Section LMA}).  The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the | 
|---|
| 3268 | output section attribute. | 
|---|
| 3269 |  | 
|---|
| 3270 | The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections | 
|---|
| 3271 | which comprise the segment.  You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to | 
|---|
| 3272 | explicitly specify the segment flags.  The value of @var{flags} must be | 
|---|
| 3273 | an integer.  It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program | 
|---|
| 3274 | header. | 
|---|
| 3275 |  | 
|---|
| 3276 | Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}.  This shows a typical set of program | 
|---|
| 3277 | headers used on a native ELF system. | 
|---|
| 3278 |  | 
|---|
| 3279 | @example | 
|---|
| 3280 | @group | 
|---|
| 3281 | PHDRS | 
|---|
| 3282 | @{ | 
|---|
| 3283 | headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ; | 
|---|
| 3284 | interp PT_INTERP ; | 
|---|
| 3285 | text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ; | 
|---|
| 3286 | data PT_LOAD ; | 
|---|
| 3287 | dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ; | 
|---|
| 3288 | @} | 
|---|
| 3289 |  | 
|---|
| 3290 | SECTIONS | 
|---|
| 3291 | @{ | 
|---|
| 3292 | . = SIZEOF_HEADERS; | 
|---|
| 3293 | .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp | 
|---|
| 3294 | .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text | 
|---|
| 3295 | .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */ | 
|---|
| 3296 | @dots{} | 
|---|
| 3297 | . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */ | 
|---|
| 3298 | .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data | 
|---|
| 3299 | .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic | 
|---|
| 3300 | @dots{} | 
|---|
| 3301 | @} | 
|---|
| 3302 | @end group | 
|---|
| 3303 | @end example | 
|---|
| 3304 |  | 
|---|
| 3305 | @node VERSION | 
|---|
| 3306 | @section VERSION Command | 
|---|
| 3307 | @kindex VERSION @{script text@} | 
|---|
| 3308 | @cindex symbol versions | 
|---|
| 3309 | @cindex version script | 
|---|
| 3310 | @cindex versions of symbols | 
|---|
| 3311 | The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF.  Symbol versions are | 
|---|
| 3312 | only useful when using shared libraries.  The dynamic linker can use | 
|---|
| 3313 | symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs | 
|---|
| 3314 | a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the | 
|---|
| 3315 | shared library. | 
|---|
| 3316 |  | 
|---|
| 3317 | You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or | 
|---|
| 3318 | you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script.  You can | 
|---|
| 3319 | also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option. | 
|---|
| 3320 |  | 
|---|
| 3321 | The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply | 
|---|
| 3322 | @smallexample | 
|---|
| 3323 | VERSION @{ version-script-commands @} | 
|---|
| 3324 | @end smallexample | 
|---|
| 3325 |  | 
|---|
| 3326 | The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by | 
|---|
| 3327 | Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5.  The version script defines a tree of | 
|---|
| 3328 | version nodes.  You specify the node names and interdependencies in the | 
|---|
| 3329 | version script.  You can specify which symbols are bound to which | 
|---|
| 3330 | version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local | 
|---|
| 3331 | scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared | 
|---|
| 3332 | library. | 
|---|
| 3333 |  | 
|---|
| 3334 | The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few | 
|---|
| 3335 | examples. | 
|---|
| 3336 |  | 
|---|
| 3337 | @smallexample | 
|---|
| 3338 | VERS_1.1 @{ | 
|---|
| 3339 | global: | 
|---|
| 3340 | foo1; | 
|---|
| 3341 | local: | 
|---|
| 3342 | old*; | 
|---|
| 3343 | original*; | 
|---|
| 3344 | new*; | 
|---|
| 3345 | @}; | 
|---|
| 3346 |  | 
|---|
| 3347 | VERS_1.2 @{ | 
|---|
| 3348 | foo2; | 
|---|
| 3349 | @} VERS_1.1; | 
|---|
| 3350 |  | 
|---|
| 3351 | VERS_2.0 @{ | 
|---|
| 3352 | bar1; bar2; | 
|---|
| 3353 | @} VERS_1.2; | 
|---|
| 3354 | @end smallexample | 
|---|
| 3355 |  | 
|---|
| 3356 | This example version script defines three version nodes.  The first | 
|---|
| 3357 | version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies. | 
|---|
| 3358 | The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}.  It reduces | 
|---|
| 3359 | a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside | 
|---|
| 3360 | of the shared library. | 
|---|
| 3361 |  | 
|---|
| 3362 | Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}.  This node | 
|---|
| 3363 | depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}.  The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2} | 
|---|
| 3364 | to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}. | 
|---|
| 3365 |  | 
|---|
| 3366 | Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}.  This node | 
|---|
| 3367 | depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}.  The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1} | 
|---|
| 3368 | and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}. | 
|---|
| 3369 |  | 
|---|
| 3370 | When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not | 
|---|
| 3371 | specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an | 
|---|
| 3372 | unspecified base version of the library.  You can bind all otherwise | 
|---|
| 3373 | unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *} | 
|---|
| 3374 | somewhere in the version script. | 
|---|
| 3375 |  | 
|---|
| 3376 | The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what | 
|---|
| 3377 | they might suggest to the person reading them.  The @samp{2.0} version | 
|---|
| 3378 | could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}. | 
|---|
| 3379 | However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script. | 
|---|
| 3380 |  | 
|---|
| 3381 | When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned | 
|---|
| 3382 | symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it | 
|---|
| 3383 | requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each | 
|---|
| 3384 | shared library it is linked against.  Thus at runtime, the dynamic | 
|---|
| 3385 | loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have | 
|---|
| 3386 | linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the | 
|---|
| 3387 | application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols.  In this | 
|---|
| 3388 | way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that | 
|---|
| 3389 | all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to | 
|---|
| 3390 | search for each symbol reference. | 
|---|
| 3391 |  | 
|---|
| 3392 | The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of | 
|---|
| 3393 | doing minor version checking that SunOS does.  The fundamental problem | 
|---|
| 3394 | that is being addressed here is that typically references to external | 
|---|
| 3395 | functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when | 
|---|
| 3396 | the application starts up.  If a shared library is out of date, a | 
|---|
| 3397 | required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use | 
|---|
| 3398 | that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail.  With symbol | 
|---|
| 3399 | versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if | 
|---|
| 3400 | the libraries being used with the application are too old. | 
|---|
| 3401 |  | 
|---|
| 3402 | There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach.  The | 
|---|
| 3403 | first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the | 
|---|
| 3404 | source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning | 
|---|
| 3405 | script.  This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library | 
|---|
| 3406 | maintainer.  You can do this by putting something like: | 
|---|
| 3407 | @smallexample | 
|---|
| 3408 | __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1"); | 
|---|
| 3409 | @end smallexample | 
|---|
| 3410 | @noindent | 
|---|
| 3411 | in the C source file.  This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to | 
|---|
| 3412 | be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}. | 
|---|
| 3413 | The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol | 
|---|
| 3414 | @samp{original_foo} from being exported. | 
|---|
| 3415 |  | 
|---|
| 3416 | The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same | 
|---|
| 3417 | function to appear in a given shared library.  In this way you can make | 
|---|
| 3418 | an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major | 
|---|
| 3419 | version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications | 
|---|
| 3420 | linked against the old interface to continue to function. | 
|---|
| 3421 |  | 
|---|
| 3422 | To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the | 
|---|
| 3423 | source file.  Here is an example: | 
|---|
| 3424 |  | 
|---|
| 3425 | @smallexample | 
|---|
| 3426 | __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@"); | 
|---|
| 3427 | __asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1"); | 
|---|
| 3428 | __asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2"); | 
|---|
| 3429 | __asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0"); | 
|---|
| 3430 | @end smallexample | 
|---|
| 3431 |  | 
|---|
| 3432 | In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the | 
|---|
| 3433 | unspecified base version of the symbol.  The source file that contains this | 
|---|
| 3434 | example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo}, | 
|---|
| 3435 | @samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}. | 
|---|
| 3436 |  | 
|---|
| 3437 | When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be | 
|---|
| 3438 | some way to specify a default version to which external references to | 
|---|
| 3439 | this symbol will be bound.  You can do this with the | 
|---|
| 3440 | @samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive.  You can only | 
|---|
| 3441 | declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise | 
|---|
| 3442 | you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol. | 
|---|
| 3443 |  | 
|---|
| 3444 | If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol | 
|---|
| 3445 | within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience | 
|---|
| 3446 | (i.e. @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to | 
|---|
| 3447 | specifically bind to an external version of the function in question. | 
|---|
| 3448 |  | 
|---|
| 3449 | @node Expressions | 
|---|
| 3450 | @section Expressions in Linker Scripts | 
|---|
| 3451 | @cindex expressions | 
|---|
| 3452 | @cindex arithmetic | 
|---|
| 3453 | The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to | 
|---|
| 3454 | that of C expressions.  All expressions are evaluated as integers.  All | 
|---|
| 3455 | expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the | 
|---|
| 3456 | host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits. | 
|---|
| 3457 |  | 
|---|
| 3458 | You can use and set symbol values in expressions. | 
|---|
| 3459 |  | 
|---|
| 3460 | The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in | 
|---|
| 3461 | expressions. | 
|---|
| 3462 |  | 
|---|
| 3463 | @menu | 
|---|
| 3464 | * Constants::                   Constants | 
|---|
| 3465 | * Symbols::                     Symbol Names | 
|---|
| 3466 | * Location Counter::            The Location Counter | 
|---|
| 3467 | * Operators::                   Operators | 
|---|
| 3468 | * Evaluation::                  Evaluation | 
|---|
| 3469 | * Expression Section::          The Section of an Expression | 
|---|
| 3470 | * Builtin Functions::           Builtin Functions | 
|---|
| 3471 | @end menu | 
|---|
| 3472 |  | 
|---|
| 3473 | @node Constants | 
|---|
| 3474 | @subsection Constants | 
|---|
| 3475 | @cindex integer notation | 
|---|
| 3476 | @cindex constants in linker scripts | 
|---|
| 3477 | All constants are integers. | 
|---|
| 3478 |  | 
|---|
| 3479 | As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be | 
|---|
| 3480 | octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be | 
|---|
| 3481 | hexadecimal.  The linker considers other integers to be decimal. | 
|---|
| 3482 |  | 
|---|
| 3483 | @cindex scaled integers | 
|---|
| 3484 | @cindex K and M integer suffixes | 
|---|
| 3485 | @cindex M and K integer suffixes | 
|---|
| 3486 | @cindex suffixes for integers | 
|---|
| 3487 | @cindex integer suffixes | 
|---|
| 3488 | In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a | 
|---|
| 3489 | constant by | 
|---|
| 3490 | @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL | 
|---|
| 3491 | @ifinfo | 
|---|
| 3492 | @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL | 
|---|
| 3493 | @code{1024} or @code{1024*1024} | 
|---|
| 3494 | @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL | 
|---|
| 3495 | @end ifinfo | 
|---|
| 3496 | @tex | 
|---|
| 3497 | ${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$ | 
|---|
| 3498 | @end tex | 
|---|
| 3499 | @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL | 
|---|
| 3500 | respectively. For example, the following all refer to the same quantity: | 
|---|
| 3501 | @smallexample | 
|---|
| 3502 | _fourk_1 = 4K; | 
|---|
| 3503 | _fourk_2 = 4096; | 
|---|
| 3504 | _fourk_3 = 0x1000; | 
|---|
| 3505 | @end smallexample | 
|---|
| 3506 |  | 
|---|
| 3507 | @node Symbols | 
|---|
| 3508 | @subsection Symbol Names | 
|---|
| 3509 | @cindex symbol names | 
|---|
| 3510 | @cindex names | 
|---|
| 3511 | @cindex quoted symbol names | 
|---|
| 3512 | @kindex " | 
|---|
| 3513 | Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period | 
|---|
| 3514 | and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens. | 
|---|
| 3515 | Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords.  You can | 
|---|
| 3516 | specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a | 
|---|
| 3517 | keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes: | 
|---|
| 3518 | @smallexample | 
|---|
| 3519 | "SECTION" = 9; | 
|---|
| 3520 | "with a space" = "also with a space" + 10; | 
|---|
| 3521 | @end smallexample | 
|---|
| 3522 |  | 
|---|
| 3523 | Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest | 
|---|
| 3524 | to delimit symbols with spaces.  For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol, | 
|---|
| 3525 | whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction. | 
|---|
| 3526 |  | 
|---|
| 3527 | @node Location Counter | 
|---|
| 3528 | @subsection The Location Counter | 
|---|
| 3529 | @kindex . | 
|---|
| 3530 | @cindex dot | 
|---|
| 3531 | @cindex location counter | 
|---|
| 3532 | @cindex current output location | 
|---|
| 3533 | The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the | 
|---|
| 3534 | current output location counter.  Since the @code{.} always refers to a | 
|---|
| 3535 | location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression | 
|---|
| 3536 | within a @code{SECTIONS} command.  The @code{.} symbol may appear | 
|---|
| 3537 | anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression. | 
|---|
| 3538 |  | 
|---|
| 3539 | @cindex holes | 
|---|
| 3540 | Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be | 
|---|
| 3541 | moved.  This may be used to create holes in the output section.  The | 
|---|
| 3542 | location counter may never be moved backwards. | 
|---|
| 3543 |  | 
|---|
| 3544 | @smallexample | 
|---|
| 3545 | SECTIONS | 
|---|
| 3546 | @{ | 
|---|
| 3547 | output : | 
|---|
| 3548 | @{ | 
|---|
| 3549 | file1(.text) | 
|---|
| 3550 | . = . + 1000; | 
|---|
| 3551 | file2(.text) | 
|---|
| 3552 | . += 1000; | 
|---|
| 3553 | file3(.text) | 
|---|
| 3554 | @} = 0x1234; | 
|---|
| 3555 | @} | 
|---|
| 3556 | @end smallexample | 
|---|
| 3557 | @noindent | 
|---|
| 3558 | In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is | 
|---|
| 3559 | located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}.  It is | 
|---|
| 3560 | followed by a 1000 byte gap.  Then the @samp{.text} section from | 
|---|
| 3561 | @file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the | 
|---|
| 3562 | @samp{.text} section from @file{file3}.  The notation @samp{= 0x1234} | 
|---|
| 3563 | specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}). | 
|---|
| 3564 |  | 
|---|
| 3565 | @cindex dot inside sections | 
|---|
| 3566 | Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the | 
|---|
| 3567 | current containing object.  Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS} | 
|---|
| 3568 | statement, whoes start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an | 
|---|
| 3569 | absolute address.  If @code{.} is used inside a section description | 
|---|
| 3570 | however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section, | 
|---|
| 3571 | not an absolute address.  Thus in a script like this: | 
|---|
| 3572 |  | 
|---|
| 3573 | @smallexample | 
|---|
| 3574 | SECTIONS | 
|---|
| 3575 | @{ | 
|---|
| 3576 | . = 0x100 | 
|---|
| 3577 | .text: @{ | 
|---|
| 3578 | *(.text) | 
|---|
| 3579 | . = 0x200 | 
|---|
| 3580 | @} | 
|---|
| 3581 | . = 0x500 | 
|---|
| 3582 | .data: @{ | 
|---|
| 3583 | *(.data) | 
|---|
| 3584 | . += 0x600 | 
|---|
| 3585 | @} | 
|---|
| 3586 | @} | 
|---|
| 3587 | @end smallexample | 
|---|
| 3588 |  | 
|---|
| 3589 | The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100 | 
|---|
| 3590 | and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in | 
|---|
| 3591 | the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area.  (If there is too | 
|---|
| 3592 | much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to | 
|---|
| 3593 | move @code{.} backwards).  The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500 | 
|---|
| 3594 | and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of | 
|---|
| 3595 | the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of | 
|---|
| 3596 | the @samp{.data} output section itself. | 
|---|
| 3597 |  | 
|---|
| 3598 | @need 2000 | 
|---|
| 3599 | @node Operators | 
|---|
| 3600 | @subsection Operators | 
|---|
| 3601 | @cindex operators for arithmetic | 
|---|
| 3602 | @cindex arithmetic operators | 
|---|
| 3603 | @cindex precedence in expressions | 
|---|
| 3604 | The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with | 
|---|
| 3605 | the standard bindings and precedence levels: | 
|---|
| 3606 | @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL | 
|---|
| 3607 | @ifinfo | 
|---|
| 3608 | @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL | 
|---|
| 3609 | @smallexample | 
|---|
| 3610 | precedence      associativity   Operators                Notes | 
|---|
| 3611 | (highest) | 
|---|
| 3612 | 1               left            !  -  ~                  (1) | 
|---|
| 3613 | 2               left            *  /  % | 
|---|
| 3614 | 3               left            +  - | 
|---|
| 3615 | 4               left            >>  << | 
|---|
| 3616 | 5               left            ==  !=  >  <  <=  >= | 
|---|
| 3617 | 6               left            & | 
|---|
| 3618 | 7               left            | | 
|---|
| 3619 | 8               left            && | 
|---|
| 3620 | 9               left            || | 
|---|
| 3621 | 10              right           ? : | 
|---|
| 3622 | 11              right           &=  +=  -=  *=  /=       (2) | 
|---|
| 3623 | (lowest) | 
|---|
| 3624 | @end smallexample | 
|---|
| 3625 | Notes: | 
|---|
| 3626 | (1) Prefix operators | 
|---|
| 3627 | (2) @xref{Assignments}. | 
|---|
| 3628 | @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL | 
|---|
| 3629 | @end ifinfo | 
|---|
| 3630 | @tex | 
|---|
| 3631 | \vskip \baselineskip | 
|---|
| 3632 | %"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample | 
|---|
| 3633 | \hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip | 
|---|
| 3634 | \hrule | 
|---|
| 3635 | \halign | 
|---|
| 3636 | {\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr | 
|---|
| 3637 | height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr | 
|---|
| 3638 | &Precedence&&  Associativity  &&{\rm Operators}&\cr | 
|---|
| 3639 | height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr | 
|---|
| 3640 | \noalign{\hrule} | 
|---|
| 3641 | height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr | 
|---|
| 3642 | &highest&&&&&\cr | 
|---|
| 3643 | % '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font | 
|---|
| 3644 | &1&&left&&\qquad-          \char'176\      !\qquad\dag&\cr | 
|---|
| 3645 | &2&&left&&*          /        \%&\cr | 
|---|
| 3646 | &3&&left&&+          -&\cr | 
|---|
| 3647 | &4&&left&&>>         <<&\cr | 
|---|
| 3648 | &5&&left&&==         !=       >      <      <=      >=&\cr | 
|---|
| 3649 | &6&&left&&\&&\cr | 
|---|
| 3650 | &7&&left&&|&\cr | 
|---|
| 3651 | &8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr | 
|---|
| 3652 | &9&&left&&||&\cr | 
|---|
| 3653 | &10&&right&&?        :&\cr | 
|---|
| 3654 | &11&&right&&\qquad\&=      +=       -=     *=     /=\qquad\ddag&\cr | 
|---|
| 3655 | &lowest&&&&&\cr | 
|---|
| 3656 | height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr} | 
|---|
| 3657 | \hrule} | 
|---|
| 3658 | @end tex | 
|---|
| 3659 | @iftex | 
|---|
| 3660 | { | 
|---|
| 3661 | @obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt | 
|---|
| 3662 | @dag@quad Prefix operators. | 
|---|
| 3663 | @ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}. | 
|---|
| 3664 | } | 
|---|
| 3665 | @end iftex | 
|---|
| 3666 | @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL | 
|---|
| 3667 |  | 
|---|
| 3668 | @node Evaluation | 
|---|
| 3669 | @subsection Evaluation | 
|---|
| 3670 | @cindex lazy evaluation | 
|---|
| 3671 | @cindex expression evaluation order | 
|---|
| 3672 | The linker evaluates expressions lazily.  It only computes the value of | 
|---|
| 3673 | an expression when absolutely necessary. | 
|---|
| 3674 |  | 
|---|
| 3675 | The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start | 
|---|
| 3676 | address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory | 
|---|
| 3677 | regions, in order to do any linking at all.  These values are computed | 
|---|
| 3678 | as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script. | 
|---|
| 3679 |  | 
|---|
| 3680 | However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed | 
|---|
| 3681 | until after storage allocation.  Such values are evaluated later, when | 
|---|
| 3682 | other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available | 
|---|
| 3683 | for use in the symbol assignment expression. | 
|---|
| 3684 |  | 
|---|
| 3685 | The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so | 
|---|
| 3686 | assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after | 
|---|
| 3687 | allocation. | 
|---|
| 3688 |  | 
|---|
| 3689 | Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter | 
|---|
| 3690 | @samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation. | 
|---|
| 3691 |  | 
|---|
| 3692 | If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not | 
|---|
| 3693 | available, then an error results.  For example, a script like the | 
|---|
| 3694 | following | 
|---|
| 3695 | @smallexample | 
|---|
| 3696 | @group | 
|---|
| 3697 | SECTIONS | 
|---|
| 3698 | @{ | 
|---|
| 3699 | .text 9+this_isnt_constant : | 
|---|
| 3700 | @{ *(.text) @} | 
|---|
| 3701 | @} | 
|---|
| 3702 | @end group | 
|---|
| 3703 | @end smallexample | 
|---|
| 3704 | @noindent | 
|---|
| 3705 | will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial | 
|---|
| 3706 | address}. | 
|---|
| 3707 |  | 
|---|
| 3708 | @node Expression Section | 
|---|
| 3709 | @subsection The Section of an Expression | 
|---|
| 3710 | @cindex expression sections | 
|---|
| 3711 | @cindex absolute expressions | 
|---|
| 3712 | @cindex relative expressions | 
|---|
| 3713 | @cindex absolute and relocatable symbols | 
|---|
| 3714 | @cindex relocatable and absolute symbols | 
|---|
| 3715 | @cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute | 
|---|
| 3716 | When the linker evaluates an expression, the result is either absolute | 
|---|
| 3717 | or relative to some section.  A relative expression is expressed as a | 
|---|
| 3718 | fixed offset from the base of a section. | 
|---|
| 3719 |  | 
|---|
| 3720 | The position of the expression within the linker script determines | 
|---|
| 3721 | whether it is absolute or relative.  An expression which appears within | 
|---|
| 3722 | an output section definition is relative to the base of the output | 
|---|
| 3723 | section.  An expression which appears elsewhere will be absolute. | 
|---|
| 3724 |  | 
|---|
| 3725 | A symbol set to a relative expression will be relocatable if you request | 
|---|
| 3726 | relocatable output using the @samp{-r} option.  That means that a | 
|---|
| 3727 | further link operation may change the value of the symbol.  The symbol's | 
|---|
| 3728 | section will be the section of the relative expression. | 
|---|
| 3729 |  | 
|---|
| 3730 | A symbol set to an absolute expression will retain the same value | 
|---|
| 3731 | through any further link operation.  The symbol will be absolute, and | 
|---|
| 3732 | will not have any particular associated section. | 
|---|
| 3733 |  | 
|---|
| 3734 | You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression | 
|---|
| 3735 | to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative.  For example, to | 
|---|
| 3736 | create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output | 
|---|
| 3737 | section @samp{.data}: | 
|---|
| 3738 | @smallexample | 
|---|
| 3739 | SECTIONS | 
|---|
| 3740 | @{ | 
|---|
| 3741 | .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @} | 
|---|
| 3742 | @} | 
|---|
| 3743 | @end smallexample | 
|---|
| 3744 | @noindent | 
|---|
| 3745 | If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the | 
|---|
| 3746 | @samp{.data} section. | 
|---|
| 3747 |  | 
|---|
| 3748 | @node Builtin Functions | 
|---|
| 3749 | @subsection Builtin Functions | 
|---|
| 3750 | @cindex functions in expressions | 
|---|
| 3751 | The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for | 
|---|
| 3752 | use in linker script expressions. | 
|---|
| 3753 |  | 
|---|
| 3754 | @table @code | 
|---|
| 3755 | @item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp}) | 
|---|
| 3756 | @kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp}) | 
|---|
| 3757 | @cindex expression, absolute | 
|---|
| 3758 | Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value | 
|---|
| 3759 | of the expression @var{exp}.  Primarily useful to assign an absolute | 
|---|
| 3760 | value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are | 
|---|
| 3761 | normally section relative.  @xref{Expression Section}. | 
|---|
| 3762 |  | 
|---|
| 3763 | @item ADDR(@var{section}) | 
|---|
| 3764 | @kindex ADDR(@var{section}) | 
|---|
| 3765 | @cindex section address in expression | 
|---|
| 3766 | Return the absolute address (the VMA) of the named @var{section}.  Your | 
|---|
| 3767 | script must previously have defined the location of that section.  In | 
|---|
| 3768 | the following example, @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned | 
|---|
| 3769 | identical values: | 
|---|
| 3770 | @smallexample | 
|---|
| 3771 | @group | 
|---|
| 3772 | SECTIONS @{ @dots{} | 
|---|
| 3773 | .output1 : | 
|---|
| 3774 | @{ | 
|---|
| 3775 | start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.); | 
|---|
| 3776 | @dots{} | 
|---|
| 3777 | @} | 
|---|
| 3778 | .output : | 
|---|
| 3779 | @{ | 
|---|
| 3780 | symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1); | 
|---|
| 3781 | symbol_2 = start_of_output_1; | 
|---|
| 3782 | @} | 
|---|
| 3783 | @dots{} @} | 
|---|
| 3784 | @end group | 
|---|
| 3785 | @end smallexample | 
|---|
| 3786 |  | 
|---|
| 3787 | @item ALIGN(@var{exp}) | 
|---|
| 3788 | @kindex ALIGN(@var{exp}) | 
|---|
| 3789 | @cindex round up location counter | 
|---|
| 3790 | @cindex align location counter | 
|---|
| 3791 | Return the location counter (@code{.}) aligned to the next @var{exp} | 
|---|
| 3792 | boundary.  @var{exp} must be an expression whose value is a power of | 
|---|
| 3793 | two.  This is equivalent to | 
|---|
| 3794 | @smallexample | 
|---|
| 3795 | (. + @var{exp} - 1) & ~(@var{exp} - 1) | 
|---|
| 3796 | @end smallexample | 
|---|
| 3797 |  | 
|---|
| 3798 | @code{ALIGN} doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just | 
|---|
| 3799 | does arithmetic on it.  Here is an example which aligns the output | 
|---|
| 3800 | @code{.data} section to the next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the | 
|---|
| 3801 | preceding section and sets a variable within the section to the next | 
|---|
| 3802 | @code{0x8000} boundary after the input sections: | 
|---|
| 3803 | @smallexample | 
|---|
| 3804 | @group | 
|---|
| 3805 | SECTIONS @{ @dots{} | 
|---|
| 3806 | .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{ | 
|---|
| 3807 | *(.data) | 
|---|
| 3808 | variable = ALIGN(0x8000); | 
|---|
| 3809 | @} | 
|---|
| 3810 | @dots{} @} | 
|---|
| 3811 | @end group | 
|---|
| 3812 | @end smallexample | 
|---|
| 3813 | @noindent | 
|---|
| 3814 | The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of | 
|---|
| 3815 | a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of | 
|---|
| 3816 | a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}).  The second use | 
|---|
| 3817 | of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol. | 
|---|
| 3818 |  | 
|---|
| 3819 | The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}. | 
|---|
| 3820 |  | 
|---|
| 3821 | @item BLOCK(@var{exp}) | 
|---|
| 3822 | @kindex BLOCK(@var{exp}) | 
|---|
| 3823 | This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker | 
|---|
| 3824 | scripts.  It is most often seen when setting the address of an output | 
|---|
| 3825 | section. | 
|---|
| 3826 |  | 
|---|
| 3827 | @item DEFINED(@var{symbol}) | 
|---|
| 3828 | @kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol}) | 
|---|
| 3829 | @cindex symbol defaults | 
|---|
| 3830 | Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is | 
|---|
| 3831 | defined, otherwise return 0.  You can use this function to provide | 
|---|
| 3832 | default values for symbols.  For example, the following script fragment | 
|---|
| 3833 | shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in | 
|---|
| 3834 | the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already | 
|---|
| 3835 | existed, its value is preserved: | 
|---|
| 3836 |  | 
|---|
| 3837 | @smallexample | 
|---|
| 3838 | @group | 
|---|
| 3839 | SECTIONS @{ @dots{} | 
|---|
| 3840 | .text : @{ | 
|---|
| 3841 | begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ; | 
|---|
| 3842 | @dots{} | 
|---|
| 3843 | @} | 
|---|
| 3844 | @dots{} | 
|---|
| 3845 | @} | 
|---|
| 3846 | @end group | 
|---|
| 3847 | @end smallexample | 
|---|
| 3848 |  | 
|---|
| 3849 | @item LOADADDR(@var{section}) | 
|---|
| 3850 | @kindex LOADADDR(@var{section}) | 
|---|
| 3851 | @cindex section load address in expression | 
|---|
| 3852 | Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}.  This is normally | 
|---|
| 3853 | the same as @code{ADDR}, but it may be different if the @code{AT} | 
|---|
| 3854 | attribute is used in the output section definition (@pxref{Output | 
|---|
| 3855 | Section LMA}). | 
|---|
| 3856 |  | 
|---|
| 3857 | @kindex MAX | 
|---|
| 3858 | @item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2}) | 
|---|
| 3859 | Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}. | 
|---|
| 3860 |  | 
|---|
| 3861 | @kindex MIN | 
|---|
| 3862 | @item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2}) | 
|---|
| 3863 | Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}. | 
|---|
| 3864 |  | 
|---|
| 3865 | @item NEXT(@var{exp}) | 
|---|
| 3866 | @kindex NEXT(@var{exp}) | 
|---|
| 3867 | @cindex unallocated address, next | 
|---|
| 3868 | Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}. | 
|---|
| 3869 | This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you | 
|---|
| 3870 | use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the | 
|---|
| 3871 | output file, the two functions are equivalent. | 
|---|
| 3872 |  | 
|---|
| 3873 | @item SIZEOF(@var{section}) | 
|---|
| 3874 | @kindex SIZEOF(@var{section}) | 
|---|
| 3875 | @cindex section size | 
|---|
| 3876 | Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has | 
|---|
| 3877 | been allocated.  If the section has not been allocated when this is | 
|---|
| 3878 | evaluated, the linker will report an error.  In the following example, | 
|---|
| 3879 | @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values: | 
|---|
| 3880 | @smallexample | 
|---|
| 3881 | @group | 
|---|
| 3882 | SECTIONS@{ @dots{} | 
|---|
| 3883 | .output @{ | 
|---|
| 3884 | .start = . ; | 
|---|
| 3885 | @dots{} | 
|---|
| 3886 | .end = . ; | 
|---|
| 3887 | @} | 
|---|
| 3888 | symbol_1 = .end - .start ; | 
|---|
| 3889 | symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output); | 
|---|
| 3890 | @dots{} @} | 
|---|
| 3891 | @end group | 
|---|
| 3892 | @end smallexample | 
|---|
| 3893 |  | 
|---|
| 3894 | @item SIZEOF_HEADERS | 
|---|
| 3895 | @itemx sizeof_headers | 
|---|
| 3896 | @kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS | 
|---|
| 3897 | @cindex header size | 
|---|
| 3898 | Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers.  This is | 
|---|
| 3899 | information which appears at the start of the output file.  You can use | 
|---|
| 3900 | this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you | 
|---|
| 3901 | choose, to facilitate paging. | 
|---|
| 3902 |  | 
|---|
| 3903 | @cindex not enough room for program headers | 
|---|
| 3904 | @cindex program headers, not enough room | 
|---|
| 3905 | When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the | 
|---|
| 3906 | @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the | 
|---|
| 3907 | number of program headers before it has determined all the section | 
|---|
| 3908 | addresses and sizes.  If the linker later discovers that it needs | 
|---|
| 3909 | additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough | 
|---|
| 3910 | room for program headers}.  To avoid this error, you must avoid using | 
|---|
| 3911 | the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker | 
|---|
| 3912 | script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or | 
|---|
| 3913 | you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS} | 
|---|
| 3914 | command (@pxref{PHDRS}). | 
|---|
| 3915 | @end table | 
|---|
| 3916 |  | 
|---|
| 3917 | @node Implicit Linker Scripts | 
|---|
| 3918 | @section Implicit Linker Scripts | 
|---|
| 3919 | @cindex implicit linker scripts | 
|---|
| 3920 | If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as | 
|---|
| 3921 | an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a | 
|---|
| 3922 | linker script.  If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the | 
|---|
| 3923 | linker will report an error. | 
|---|
| 3924 |  | 
|---|
| 3925 | An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script. | 
|---|
| 3926 |  | 
|---|
| 3927 | Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol | 
|---|
| 3928 | assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION} | 
|---|
| 3929 | commands. | 
|---|
| 3930 |  | 
|---|
| 3931 | Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read | 
|---|
| 3932 | at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was | 
|---|
| 3933 | read.  This can affect archive searching. | 
|---|
| 3934 |  | 
|---|
| 3935 | @ifset GENERIC | 
|---|
| 3936 | @node Machine Dependent | 
|---|
| 3937 | @chapter Machine Dependent Features | 
|---|
| 3938 |  | 
|---|
| 3939 | @cindex machine dependencies | 
|---|
| 3940 | @code{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following | 
|---|
| 3941 | sections describe them.  Machines where @code{ld} has no additional | 
|---|
| 3942 | functionality are not listed. | 
|---|
| 3943 |  | 
|---|
| 3944 | @menu | 
|---|
| 3945 | * H8/300::                      @code{ld} and the H8/300 | 
|---|
| 3946 | * i960::                        @code{ld} and the Intel 960 family | 
|---|
| 3947 | * ARM::                         @code{ld} and the ARM family | 
|---|
| 3948 | * HPPA ELF32::                  @code{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF | 
|---|
| 3949 | @ifset TICOFF | 
|---|
| 3950 | * TI COFF::                     @code{ld} and TI COFF | 
|---|
| 3951 | @end ifset | 
|---|
| 3952 | @end menu | 
|---|
| 3953 | @end ifset | 
|---|
| 3954 |  | 
|---|
| 3955 | @c FIXME!  This could use @raisesections/@lowersections, but there seems to be a conflict | 
|---|
| 3956 | @c         between those and node-defaulting. | 
|---|
| 3957 | @ifset H8300 | 
|---|
| 3958 | @ifclear GENERIC | 
|---|
| 3959 | @raisesections | 
|---|
| 3960 | @end ifclear | 
|---|
| 3961 |  | 
|---|
| 3962 | @node H8/300 | 
|---|
| 3963 | @section @code{ld} and the H8/300 | 
|---|
| 3964 |  | 
|---|
| 3965 | @cindex H8/300 support | 
|---|
| 3966 | For the H8/300, @code{ld} can perform these global optimizations when | 
|---|
| 3967 | you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option. | 
|---|
| 3968 |  | 
|---|
| 3969 | @table @emph | 
|---|
| 3970 | @cindex relaxing on H8/300 | 
|---|
| 3971 | @item relaxing address modes | 
|---|
| 3972 | @code{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose | 
|---|
| 3973 | targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit | 
|---|
| 3974 | program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions, | 
|---|
| 3975 | respectively. | 
|---|
| 3976 |  | 
|---|
| 3977 | @cindex synthesizing on H8/300 | 
|---|
| 3978 | @item synthesizing instructions | 
|---|
| 3979 | @c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? | 
|---|
| 3980 | @code{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the | 
|---|
| 3981 | sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top | 
|---|
| 3982 | page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form. | 
|---|
| 3983 | (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into | 
|---|
| 3984 | @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the | 
|---|
| 3985 | top page of memory). | 
|---|
| 3986 | @end table | 
|---|
| 3987 |  | 
|---|
| 3988 | @ifclear GENERIC | 
|---|
| 3989 | @lowersections | 
|---|
| 3990 | @end ifclear | 
|---|
| 3991 | @end ifset | 
|---|
| 3992 |  | 
|---|
| 3993 | @ifclear GENERIC | 
|---|
| 3994 | @ifset Hitachi | 
|---|
| 3995 | @c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned | 
|---|
| 3996 | @c with Hitachi chips; don't enable it for generic case, please. | 
|---|
| 3997 | @node Hitachi | 
|---|
| 3998 | @chapter @code{ld} and other Hitachi chips | 
|---|
| 3999 |  | 
|---|
| 4000 | @code{ld} also supports the H8/300H, the H8/500, and the Hitachi SH.  No | 
|---|
| 4001 | special features, commands, or command-line options are required for | 
|---|
| 4002 | these chips. | 
|---|
| 4003 | @end ifset | 
|---|
| 4004 | @end ifclear | 
|---|
| 4005 |  | 
|---|
| 4006 | @ifset I960 | 
|---|
| 4007 | @ifclear GENERIC | 
|---|
| 4008 | @raisesections | 
|---|
| 4009 | @end ifclear | 
|---|
| 4010 |  | 
|---|
| 4011 | @node i960 | 
|---|
| 4012 | @section @code{ld} and the Intel 960 family | 
|---|
| 4013 |  | 
|---|
| 4014 | @cindex i960 support | 
|---|
| 4015 |  | 
|---|
| 4016 | You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to | 
|---|
| 4017 | specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960 | 
|---|
| 4018 | family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any | 
|---|
| 4019 | incompatible instructions in the input files.  It also modifies the | 
|---|
| 4020 | linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of | 
|---|
| 4021 | libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the | 
|---|
| 4022 | search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture. | 
|---|
| 4023 |  | 
|---|
| 4024 | For example, if your @code{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as | 
|---|
| 4025 | well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search | 
|---|
| 4026 | paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with | 
|---|
| 4027 | the names | 
|---|
| 4028 |  | 
|---|
| 4029 | @smallexample | 
|---|
| 4030 | @group | 
|---|
| 4031 | try | 
|---|
| 4032 | libtry.a | 
|---|
| 4033 | tryca | 
|---|
| 4034 | libtryca.a | 
|---|
| 4035 | @end group | 
|---|
| 4036 | @end smallexample | 
|---|
| 4037 |  | 
|---|
| 4038 | @noindent | 
|---|
| 4039 | The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last | 
|---|
| 4040 | two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}. | 
|---|
| 4041 |  | 
|---|
| 4042 | You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since | 
|---|
| 4043 | the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each | 
|---|
| 4044 | use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}} | 
|---|
| 4045 | specifies a library. | 
|---|
| 4046 |  | 
|---|
| 4047 | @cindex @code{--relax} on i960 | 
|---|
| 4048 | @cindex relaxing on i960 | 
|---|
| 4049 | @code{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family.  If | 
|---|
| 4050 | you specify @samp{--relax}, @code{ld} finds all @code{balx} and | 
|---|
| 4051 | @code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns | 
|---|
| 4052 | them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal} | 
|---|
| 4053 | instructions, respectively.  @code{ld} also turns @code{cal} | 
|---|
| 4054 | instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the | 
|---|
| 4055 | target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does | 
|---|
| 4056 | not itself call any subroutines). | 
|---|
| 4057 |  | 
|---|
| 4058 | @ifclear GENERIC | 
|---|
| 4059 | @lowersections | 
|---|
| 4060 | @end ifclear | 
|---|
| 4061 | @end ifset | 
|---|
| 4062 |  | 
|---|
| 4063 | @ifclear GENERIC | 
|---|
| 4064 | @raisesections | 
|---|
| 4065 | @end ifclear | 
|---|
| 4066 |  | 
|---|
| 4067 | @node ARM | 
|---|
| 4068 | @section @code{ld}'s support for interworking between ARM and Thumb code | 
|---|
| 4069 |  | 
|---|
| 4070 | @cindex ARM interworking support | 
|---|
| 4071 | @kindex --support-old-code | 
|---|
| 4072 | For the ARM, @code{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls | 
|---|
| 4073 | betweem ARM and Thumb code.  These stubs only work with code that has | 
|---|
| 4074 | been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command | 
|---|
| 4075 | line option.  If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or | 
|---|
| 4076 | libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork | 
|---|
| 4077 | option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be | 
|---|
| 4078 | given to the linker.  This will make it generate larger stub functions | 
|---|
| 4079 | which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code.  Note, however, | 
|---|
| 4080 | the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to | 
|---|
| 4081 | non-interworking aware Thumb code. | 
|---|
| 4082 |  | 
|---|
| 4083 | @cindex thumb entry point | 
|---|
| 4084 | @cindex entry point, thumb | 
|---|
| 4085 | @kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry} | 
|---|
| 4086 | The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic | 
|---|
| 4087 | @samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address. | 
|---|
| 4088 | But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be | 
|---|
| 4089 | branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start | 
|---|
| 4090 | executing in Thumb mode straight away. | 
|---|
| 4091 |  | 
|---|
| 4092 | @node HPPA ELF32 | 
|---|
| 4093 | @section @code{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF support | 
|---|
| 4094 | @cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs | 
|---|
| 4095 | @kindex --multi-subspace | 
|---|
| 4096 | When generating a shared library, @code{ld} will by default generate | 
|---|
| 4097 | import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application. | 
|---|
| 4098 | The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @code{ld} to generate export | 
|---|
| 4099 | stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with | 
|---|
| 4100 | multiple sub-spaces. | 
|---|
| 4101 |  | 
|---|
| 4102 | @cindex HPPA stub grouping | 
|---|
| 4103 | @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N} | 
|---|
| 4104 | Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @code{ld} in | 
|---|
| 4105 | stub sections located between groups of input sections. | 
|---|
| 4106 | @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input | 
|---|
| 4107 | sections handled by one stub section.  Since branch offsets are signed, | 
|---|
| 4108 | a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before | 
|---|
| 4109 | the stub section, and one group after it.  However, when using | 
|---|
| 4110 | conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch | 
|---|
| 4111 | prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections. | 
|---|
| 4112 | A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that | 
|---|
| 4113 | branches to stubs always use a negative offset.  Two special values of | 
|---|
| 4114 | @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}.  These both instruct | 
|---|
| 4115 | @code{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types | 
|---|
| 4116 | detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other | 
|---|
| 4117 | positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively. | 
|---|
| 4118 |  | 
|---|
| 4119 | Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections.  A | 
|---|
| 4120 | single input section larger than the group size specified will of course | 
|---|
| 4121 | create a larger group (of one section).  If input sections are too | 
|---|
| 4122 | large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub. | 
|---|
| 4123 |  | 
|---|
| 4124 | @ifset TICOFF | 
|---|
| 4125 | @node TI COFF | 
|---|
| 4126 | @section @code{ld}'s support for various TI COFF versions | 
|---|
| 4127 | @cindex TI COFF versions | 
|---|
| 4128 | @kindex --format=@var{version} | 
|---|
| 4129 | The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various | 
|---|
| 4130 | TI COFF versions.  The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are | 
|---|
| 4131 | also supported.  The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order | 
|---|
| 4132 | format; @code{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output | 
|---|
| 4133 | header format depends on the default specified by the specific target. | 
|---|
| 4134 | @end ifset | 
|---|
| 4135 |  | 
|---|
| 4136 | @ifclear GENERIC | 
|---|
| 4137 | @lowersections | 
|---|
| 4138 | @end ifclear | 
|---|
| 4139 |  | 
|---|
| 4140 | @ifclear SingleFormat | 
|---|
| 4141 | @node BFD | 
|---|
| 4142 | @chapter BFD | 
|---|
| 4143 |  | 
|---|
| 4144 | @cindex back end | 
|---|
| 4145 | @cindex object file management | 
|---|
| 4146 | @cindex object formats available | 
|---|
| 4147 | @kindex objdump -i | 
|---|
| 4148 | The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries. | 
|---|
| 4149 | These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on | 
|---|
| 4150 | object files whatever the object file format.  A different object file | 
|---|
| 4151 | format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding | 
|---|
| 4152 | it to the library.  To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and | 
|---|
| 4153 | associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the | 
|---|
| 4154 | object file formats available.  You can use @code{objdump -i} | 
|---|
| 4155 | (@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to | 
|---|
| 4156 | list all the formats available for your configuration. | 
|---|
| 4157 |  | 
|---|
| 4158 | @cindex BFD requirements | 
|---|
| 4159 | @cindex requirements for BFD | 
|---|
| 4160 | As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between | 
|---|
| 4161 | several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing | 
|---|
| 4162 | BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between | 
|---|
| 4163 | formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not | 
|---|
| 4164 | been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since | 
|---|
| 4165 | BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care | 
|---|
| 4166 | may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed. | 
|---|
| 4167 |  | 
|---|
| 4168 | One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in | 
|---|
| 4169 | mind is the potential for information loss.  There are two places where | 
|---|
| 4170 | useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during | 
|---|
| 4171 | conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}. | 
|---|
| 4172 |  | 
|---|
| 4173 | @menu | 
|---|
| 4174 | * BFD outline::                 How it works: an outline of BFD | 
|---|
| 4175 | @end menu | 
|---|
| 4176 |  | 
|---|
| 4177 | @node BFD outline | 
|---|
| 4178 | @section How it works: an outline of BFD | 
|---|
| 4179 | @cindex opening object files | 
|---|
| 4180 | @include bfdsumm.texi | 
|---|
| 4181 | @end ifclear | 
|---|
| 4182 |  | 
|---|
| 4183 | @node Reporting Bugs | 
|---|
| 4184 | @chapter Reporting Bugs | 
|---|
| 4185 | @cindex bugs in @code{ld} | 
|---|
| 4186 | @cindex reporting bugs in @code{ld} | 
|---|
| 4187 |  | 
|---|
| 4188 | Your bug reports play an essential role in making @code{ld} reliable. | 
|---|
| 4189 |  | 
|---|
| 4190 | Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or | 
|---|
| 4191 | it may not.  But in any case the principal function of a bug report is | 
|---|
| 4192 | to help the entire community by making the next version of @code{ld} | 
|---|
| 4193 | work better.  Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of | 
|---|
| 4194 | @code{ld}. | 
|---|
| 4195 |  | 
|---|
| 4196 | In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the | 
|---|
| 4197 | information that enables us to fix the bug. | 
|---|
| 4198 |  | 
|---|
| 4199 | @menu | 
|---|
| 4200 | * Bug Criteria::                Have you found a bug? | 
|---|
| 4201 | * Bug Reporting::               How to report bugs | 
|---|
| 4202 | @end menu | 
|---|
| 4203 |  | 
|---|
| 4204 | @node Bug Criteria | 
|---|
| 4205 | @section Have you found a bug? | 
|---|
| 4206 | @cindex bug criteria | 
|---|
| 4207 |  | 
|---|
| 4208 | If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines: | 
|---|
| 4209 |  | 
|---|
| 4210 | @itemize @bullet | 
|---|
| 4211 | @cindex fatal signal | 
|---|
| 4212 | @cindex linker crash | 
|---|
| 4213 | @cindex crash of linker | 
|---|
| 4214 | @item | 
|---|
| 4215 | If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a | 
|---|
| 4216 | @code{ld} bug.  Reliable linkers never crash. | 
|---|
| 4217 |  | 
|---|
| 4218 | @cindex error on valid input | 
|---|
| 4219 | @item | 
|---|
| 4220 | If @code{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug. | 
|---|
| 4221 |  | 
|---|
| 4222 | @cindex invalid input | 
|---|
| 4223 | @item | 
|---|
| 4224 | If @code{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that | 
|---|
| 4225 | may be a bug.  In the general case, the linker can not verify that | 
|---|
| 4226 | object files are correct. | 
|---|
| 4227 |  | 
|---|
| 4228 | @item | 
|---|
| 4229 | If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for | 
|---|
| 4230 | improvement of @code{ld} are welcome in any case. | 
|---|
| 4231 | @end itemize | 
|---|
| 4232 |  | 
|---|
| 4233 | @node Bug Reporting | 
|---|
| 4234 | @section How to report bugs | 
|---|
| 4235 | @cindex bug reports | 
|---|
| 4236 | @cindex @code{ld} bugs, reporting | 
|---|
| 4237 |  | 
|---|
| 4238 | A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu} | 
|---|
| 4239 | products.  If you obtained @code{ld} from a support organization, we | 
|---|
| 4240 | recommend you contact that organization first. | 
|---|
| 4241 |  | 
|---|
| 4242 | You can find contact information for many support companies and | 
|---|
| 4243 | individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs | 
|---|
| 4244 | distribution. | 
|---|
| 4245 |  | 
|---|
| 4246 | Otherwise, send bug reports for @code{ld} to | 
|---|
| 4247 | @samp{bug-binutils@@gnu.org}. | 
|---|
| 4248 |  | 
|---|
| 4249 | The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this: | 
|---|
| 4250 | @strong{report all the facts}.  If you are not sure whether to state a | 
|---|
| 4251 | fact or leave it out, state it! | 
|---|
| 4252 |  | 
|---|
| 4253 | Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the | 
|---|
| 4254 | problem and assume that some details do not matter.  Thus, you might | 
|---|
| 4255 | assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not matter. | 
|---|
| 4256 | Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure.  Perhaps the bug is | 
|---|
| 4257 | a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the location where | 
|---|
| 4258 | that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name were different, the | 
|---|
| 4259 | contents of that location would fool the linker into doing the right | 
|---|
| 4260 | thing despite the bug.  Play it safe and give a specific, complete | 
|---|
| 4261 | example.  That is the easiest thing for you to do, and the most helpful. | 
|---|
| 4262 |  | 
|---|
| 4263 | Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix the bug if | 
|---|
| 4264 | it is new to us.  Therefore, always write your bug reports on the assumption | 
|---|
| 4265 | that the bug has not been reported previously. | 
|---|
| 4266 |  | 
|---|
| 4267 | Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a | 
|---|
| 4268 | bell?''  Those bug reports are useless, and we urge everyone to | 
|---|
| 4269 | @emph{refuse to respond to them} except to chide the sender to report | 
|---|
| 4270 | bugs properly. | 
|---|
| 4271 |  | 
|---|
| 4272 | To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things: | 
|---|
| 4273 |  | 
|---|
| 4274 | @itemize @bullet | 
|---|
| 4275 | @item | 
|---|
| 4276 | The version of @code{ld}.  @code{ld} announces it if you start it with | 
|---|
| 4277 | the @samp{--version} argument. | 
|---|
| 4278 |  | 
|---|
| 4279 | Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for | 
|---|
| 4280 | the bug in the current version of @code{ld}. | 
|---|
| 4281 |  | 
|---|
| 4282 | @item | 
|---|
| 4283 | Any patches you may have applied to the @code{ld} source, including any | 
|---|
| 4284 | patches made to the @code{BFD} library. | 
|---|
| 4285 |  | 
|---|
| 4286 | @item | 
|---|
| 4287 | The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and | 
|---|
| 4288 | version number. | 
|---|
| 4289 |  | 
|---|
| 4290 | @item | 
|---|
| 4291 | What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @code{ld}---e.g. | 
|---|
| 4292 | ``@code{gcc-2.7}''. | 
|---|
| 4293 |  | 
|---|
| 4294 | @item | 
|---|
| 4295 | The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and | 
|---|
| 4296 | observe the bug.  To guarantee you will not omit something important, | 
|---|
| 4297 | list them all.  A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is | 
|---|
| 4298 | sufficient. | 
|---|
| 4299 |  | 
|---|
| 4300 | If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong | 
|---|
| 4301 | and then we might not encounter the bug. | 
|---|
| 4302 |  | 
|---|
| 4303 | @item | 
|---|
| 4304 | A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the | 
|---|
| 4305 | bug.  It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files, | 
|---|
| 4306 | uuencoded if necessary to get them through the mail system.  Making them | 
|---|
| 4307 | available for anonymous FTP is not as good, but may be the only | 
|---|
| 4308 | reasonable choice for large object files. | 
|---|
| 4309 |  | 
|---|
| 4310 | If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using | 
|---|
| 4311 | @code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the | 
|---|
| 4312 | object files.  In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of | 
|---|
| 4313 | @code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files.  Also say | 
|---|
| 4314 | how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured. | 
|---|
| 4315 |  | 
|---|
| 4316 | @item | 
|---|
| 4317 | A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is | 
|---|
| 4318 | incorrect.  For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.'' | 
|---|
| 4319 |  | 
|---|
| 4320 | Of course, if the bug is that @code{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we | 
|---|
| 4321 | will certainly notice it.  But if the bug is incorrect output, we might | 
|---|
| 4322 | not notice unless it is glaringly wrong.  You might as well not give us | 
|---|
| 4323 | a chance to make a mistake. | 
|---|
| 4324 |  | 
|---|
| 4325 | Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still | 
|---|
| 4326 | say so explicitly.  Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your | 
|---|
| 4327 | copy of @code{ld} is out of synch, or you have encountered a bug in the | 
|---|
| 4328 | C library on your system.  (This has happened!)  Your copy might crash | 
|---|
| 4329 | and ours would not.  If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours | 
|---|
| 4330 | fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us.  If | 
|---|
| 4331 | you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw | 
|---|
| 4332 | any conclusion from our observations. | 
|---|
| 4333 |  | 
|---|
| 4334 | @item | 
|---|
| 4335 | If you wish to suggest changes to the @code{ld} source, send us context | 
|---|
| 4336 | diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or | 
|---|
| 4337 | @samp{-p} option.  Always send diffs from the old file to the new file. | 
|---|
| 4338 | If you even discuss something in the @code{ld} source, refer to it by | 
|---|
| 4339 | context, not by line number. | 
|---|
| 4340 |  | 
|---|
| 4341 | The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your | 
|---|
| 4342 | sources.  Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us. | 
|---|
| 4343 | @end itemize | 
|---|
| 4344 |  | 
|---|
| 4345 | Here are some things that are not necessary: | 
|---|
| 4346 |  | 
|---|
| 4347 | @itemize @bullet | 
|---|
| 4348 | @item | 
|---|
| 4349 | A description of the envelope of the bug. | 
|---|
| 4350 |  | 
|---|
| 4351 | Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating | 
|---|
| 4352 | which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which | 
|---|
| 4353 | changes will not affect it. | 
|---|
| 4354 |  | 
|---|
| 4355 | This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we | 
|---|
| 4356 | will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger | 
|---|
| 4357 | with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples. | 
|---|
| 4358 | We recommend that you save your time for something else. | 
|---|
| 4359 |  | 
|---|
| 4360 | Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead} | 
|---|
| 4361 | of the original one, that is a convenience for us.  Errors in the | 
|---|
| 4362 | output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take | 
|---|
| 4363 | less time, and so on. | 
|---|
| 4364 |  | 
|---|
| 4365 | However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this, | 
|---|
| 4366 | report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used. | 
|---|
| 4367 |  | 
|---|
| 4368 | @item | 
|---|
| 4369 | A patch for the bug. | 
|---|
| 4370 |  | 
|---|
| 4371 | A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one.  But do not omit | 
|---|
| 4372 | the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that | 
|---|
| 4373 | a patch is all we need.  We might see problems with your patch and decide | 
|---|
| 4374 | to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all. | 
|---|
| 4375 |  | 
|---|
| 4376 | Sometimes with a program as complicated as @code{ld} it is very hard to | 
|---|
| 4377 | construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path | 
|---|
| 4378 | through the code.  If you do not send us the example, we will not be | 
|---|
| 4379 | able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is | 
|---|
| 4380 | fixed. | 
|---|
| 4381 |  | 
|---|
| 4382 | And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your | 
|---|
| 4383 | patch should be an improvement, we will not install it.  A test case will | 
|---|
| 4384 | help us to understand. | 
|---|
| 4385 |  | 
|---|
| 4386 | @item | 
|---|
| 4387 | A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on. | 
|---|
| 4388 |  | 
|---|
| 4389 | Such guesses are usually wrong.  Even we cannot guess right about such | 
|---|
| 4390 | things without first using the debugger to find the facts. | 
|---|
| 4391 | @end itemize | 
|---|
| 4392 |  | 
|---|
| 4393 | @node MRI | 
|---|
| 4394 | @appendix MRI Compatible Script Files | 
|---|
| 4395 | @cindex MRI compatibility | 
|---|
| 4396 | To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @code{ld} from the MRI | 
|---|
| 4397 | linker, @code{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an | 
|---|
| 4398 | alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language | 
|---|
| 4399 | described in @ref{Scripts}.  MRI compatible linker scripts have a much | 
|---|
| 4400 | simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with | 
|---|
| 4401 | @code{ld}.  @sc{gnu} @code{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI | 
|---|
| 4402 | linker commands; these commands are described here. | 
|---|
| 4403 |  | 
|---|
| 4404 | In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object | 
|---|
| 4405 | file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some | 
|---|
| 4406 | features to make use of them. | 
|---|
| 4407 |  | 
|---|
| 4408 | You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the | 
|---|
| 4409 | @samp{-c} command-line option. | 
|---|
| 4410 |  | 
|---|
| 4411 | Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each | 
|---|
| 4412 | command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though | 
|---|
| 4413 | blank lines are also allowed for punctuation).  If a line of an | 
|---|
| 4414 | MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @code{ld} | 
|---|
| 4415 | issues a warning message, but continues processing the script. | 
|---|
| 4416 |  | 
|---|
| 4417 | Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments. | 
|---|
| 4418 |  | 
|---|
| 4419 | You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all | 
|---|
| 4420 | lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}. | 
|---|
| 4421 | The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command. | 
|---|
| 4422 |  | 
|---|
| 4423 | @table @code | 
|---|
| 4424 | @cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI) | 
|---|
| 4425 | @item ABSOLUTE @var{secname} | 
|---|
| 4426 | @itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname} | 
|---|
| 4427 | Normally, @code{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all | 
|---|
| 4428 | the input files.  However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the | 
|---|
| 4429 | @code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in | 
|---|
| 4430 | your output program.  If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a | 
|---|
| 4431 | script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE} | 
|---|
| 4432 | commands will appear in the linker output.  You can still use other | 
|---|
| 4433 | input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using | 
|---|
| 4434 | @code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file. | 
|---|
| 4435 |  | 
|---|
| 4436 | @cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI) | 
|---|
| 4437 | @item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname} | 
|---|
| 4438 | Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname} | 
|---|
| 4439 | in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file. | 
|---|
| 4440 |  | 
|---|
| 4441 | @var{in-secname} may be an integer. | 
|---|
| 4442 |  | 
|---|
| 4443 | @cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI) | 
|---|
| 4444 | @item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression} | 
|---|
| 4445 | Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}.  The | 
|---|
| 4446 | @var{expression} should be a power of two. | 
|---|
| 4447 |  | 
|---|
| 4448 | @cindex @code{BASE} (MRI) | 
|---|
| 4449 | @item BASE @var{expression} | 
|---|
| 4450 | Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than | 
|---|
| 4451 | absolute addresses) in the output file. | 
|---|
| 4452 |  | 
|---|
| 4453 | @cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI) | 
|---|
| 4454 | @item CHIP @var{expression} | 
|---|
| 4455 | @itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression} | 
|---|
| 4456 | This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility. | 
|---|
| 4457 |  | 
|---|
| 4458 | @cindex @code{END} (MRI) | 
|---|
| 4459 | @item END | 
|---|
| 4460 | This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility. | 
|---|
| 4461 |  | 
|---|
| 4462 | @cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI) | 
|---|
| 4463 | @item FORMAT @var{output-format} | 
|---|
| 4464 | Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker | 
|---|
| 4465 | language, but restricted to one of these output formats: | 
|---|
| 4466 |  | 
|---|
| 4467 | @enumerate | 
|---|
| 4468 | @item | 
|---|
| 4469 | S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S} | 
|---|
| 4470 |  | 
|---|
| 4471 | @item | 
|---|
| 4472 | IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE} | 
|---|
| 4473 |  | 
|---|
| 4474 | @item | 
|---|
| 4475 | COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is | 
|---|
| 4476 | @samp{COFF} | 
|---|
| 4477 | @end enumerate | 
|---|
| 4478 |  | 
|---|
| 4479 | @cindex @code{LIST} (MRI) | 
|---|
| 4480 | @item LIST @var{anything}@dots{} | 
|---|
| 4481 | Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the | 
|---|
| 4482 | @code{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}. | 
|---|
| 4483 |  | 
|---|
| 4484 | The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the | 
|---|
| 4485 | same line, with no change in its effect. | 
|---|
| 4486 |  | 
|---|
| 4487 | @cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI) | 
|---|
| 4488 | @item LOAD @var{filename} | 
|---|
| 4489 | @itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename} | 
|---|
| 4490 | Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the | 
|---|
| 4491 | same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @code{ld} | 
|---|
| 4492 | command line. | 
|---|
| 4493 |  | 
|---|
| 4494 | @cindex @code{NAME} (MRI) | 
|---|
| 4495 | @item NAME @var{output-name} | 
|---|
| 4496 | @var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @code{ld}; the | 
|---|
| 4497 | MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line | 
|---|
| 4498 | option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}. | 
|---|
| 4499 |  | 
|---|
| 4500 | @cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI) | 
|---|
| 4501 | @item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname} | 
|---|
| 4502 | @itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname} | 
|---|
| 4503 | Normally, @code{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the | 
|---|
| 4504 | order in which they first appear in the input files.  In an MRI-compatible | 
|---|
| 4505 | script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command.  The | 
|---|
| 4506 | sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output | 
|---|
| 4507 | file, in the order specified. | 
|---|
| 4508 |  | 
|---|
| 4509 | @cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI) | 
|---|
| 4510 | @item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression} | 
|---|
| 4511 | @itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression} | 
|---|
| 4512 | @itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression} | 
|---|
| 4513 | Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol | 
|---|
| 4514 | @var{name} used in the linker input files. | 
|---|
| 4515 |  | 
|---|
| 4516 | @cindex @code{SECT} (MRI) | 
|---|
| 4517 | @item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression} | 
|---|
| 4518 | @itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression} | 
|---|
| 4519 | @itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression} | 
|---|
| 4520 | You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to | 
|---|
| 4521 | specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}. | 
|---|
| 4522 | If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same | 
|---|
| 4523 | @var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address. | 
|---|
| 4524 | @end table | 
|---|
| 4525 |  | 
|---|
| 4526 | @node GNU Free Documentation License | 
|---|
| 4527 | @appendix GNU Free Documentation License | 
|---|
| 4528 | @cindex GNU Free Documentation License | 
|---|
| 4529 |  | 
|---|
| 4530 | GNU Free Documentation License | 
|---|
| 4531 |  | 
|---|
| 4532 | Version 1.1, March 2000 | 
|---|
| 4533 |  | 
|---|
| 4534 | Copyright (C) 2000  Free Software Foundation, Inc. | 
|---|
| 4535 | 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA  02111-1307  USA | 
|---|
| 4536 |  | 
|---|
| 4537 | Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies | 
|---|
| 4538 | of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. | 
|---|
| 4539 |  | 
|---|
| 4540 |  | 
|---|
| 4541 | 0. PREAMBLE | 
|---|
| 4542 |  | 
|---|
| 4543 | The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other | 
|---|
| 4544 | written document "free" in the sense of freedom: to assure everyone | 
|---|
| 4545 | the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it, with or without | 
|---|
| 4546 | modifying it, either commercially or noncommercially.  Secondarily, | 
|---|
| 4547 | this License preserves for the author and publisher a way to get | 
|---|
| 4548 | credit for their work, while not being considered responsible for | 
|---|
| 4549 | modifications made by others. | 
|---|
| 4550 |  | 
|---|
| 4551 | This License is a kind of "copyleft", which means that derivative | 
|---|
| 4552 | works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense.  It | 
|---|
| 4553 | complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft | 
|---|
| 4554 | license designed for free software. | 
|---|
| 4555 |  | 
|---|
| 4556 | We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for free | 
|---|
| 4557 | software, because free software needs free documentation: a free | 
|---|
| 4558 | program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms that the | 
|---|
| 4559 | software does.  But this License is not limited to software manuals; | 
|---|
| 4560 | it can be used for any textual work, regardless of subject matter or | 
|---|
| 4561 | whether it is published as a printed book.  We recommend this License | 
|---|
| 4562 | principally for works whose purpose is instruction or reference. | 
|---|
| 4563 |  | 
|---|
| 4564 |  | 
|---|
| 4565 | 1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS | 
|---|
| 4566 |  | 
|---|
| 4567 | This License applies to any manual or other work that contains a | 
|---|
| 4568 | notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed | 
|---|
| 4569 | under the terms of this License.  The "Document", below, refers to any | 
|---|
| 4570 | such manual or work.  Any member of the public is a licensee, and is | 
|---|
| 4571 | addressed as "you". | 
|---|
| 4572 |  | 
|---|
| 4573 | A "Modified Version" of the Document means any work containing the | 
|---|
| 4574 | Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with | 
|---|
| 4575 | modifications and/or translated into another language. | 
|---|
| 4576 |  | 
|---|
| 4577 | A "Secondary Section" is a named appendix or a front-matter section of | 
|---|
| 4578 | the Document that deals exclusively with the relationship of the | 
|---|
| 4579 | publishers or authors of the Document to the Document's overall subject | 
|---|
| 4580 | (or to related matters) and contains nothing that could fall directly | 
|---|
| 4581 | within that overall subject.  (For example, if the Document is in part a | 
|---|
| 4582 | textbook of mathematics, a Secondary Section may not explain any | 
|---|
| 4583 | mathematics.)  The relationship could be a matter of historical | 
|---|
| 4584 | connection with the subject or with related matters, or of legal, | 
|---|
| 4585 | commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position regarding | 
|---|
| 4586 | them. | 
|---|
| 4587 |  | 
|---|
| 4588 | The "Invariant Sections" are certain Secondary Sections whose titles | 
|---|
| 4589 | are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in the notice | 
|---|
| 4590 | that says that the Document is released under this License. | 
|---|
| 4591 |  | 
|---|
| 4592 | The "Cover Texts" are certain short passages of text that are listed, | 
|---|
| 4593 | as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that says that | 
|---|
| 4594 | the Document is released under this License. | 
|---|
| 4595 |  | 
|---|
| 4596 | A "Transparent" copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy, | 
|---|
| 4597 | represented in a format whose specification is available to the | 
|---|
| 4598 | general public, whose contents can be viewed and edited directly and | 
|---|
| 4599 | straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images composed of | 
|---|
| 4600 | pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some widely available | 
|---|
| 4601 | drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text formatters or | 
|---|
| 4602 | for automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for input | 
|---|
| 4603 | to text formatters.  A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file | 
|---|
| 4604 | format whose markup has been designed to thwart or discourage | 
|---|
| 4605 | subsequent modification by readers is not Transparent.  A copy that is | 
|---|
| 4606 | not "Transparent" is called "Opaque". | 
|---|
| 4607 |  | 
|---|
| 4608 | Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain | 
|---|
| 4609 | ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format, SGML | 
|---|
| 4610 | or XML using a publicly available DTD, and standard-conforming simple | 
|---|
| 4611 | HTML designed for human modification.  Opaque formats include | 
|---|
| 4612 | PostScript, PDF, proprietary formats that can be read and edited only | 
|---|
| 4613 | by proprietary word processors, SGML or XML for which the DTD and/or | 
|---|
| 4614 | processing tools are not generally available, and the | 
|---|
| 4615 | machine-generated HTML produced by some word processors for output | 
|---|
| 4616 | purposes only. | 
|---|
| 4617 |  | 
|---|
| 4618 | The "Title Page" means, for a printed book, the title page itself, | 
|---|
| 4619 | plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the material | 
|---|
| 4620 | this License requires to appear in the title page.  For works in | 
|---|
| 4621 | formats which do not have any title page as such, "Title Page" means | 
|---|
| 4622 | the text near the most prominent appearance of the work's title, | 
|---|
| 4623 | preceding the beginning of the body of the text. | 
|---|
| 4624 |  | 
|---|
| 4625 |  | 
|---|
| 4626 | 2. VERBATIM COPYING | 
|---|
| 4627 |  | 
|---|
| 4628 | You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either | 
|---|
| 4629 | commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the | 
|---|
| 4630 | copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License applies | 
|---|
| 4631 | to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you add no other | 
|---|
| 4632 | conditions whatsoever to those of this License.  You may not use | 
|---|
| 4633 | technical measures to obstruct or control the reading or further | 
|---|
| 4634 | copying of the copies you make or distribute.  However, you may accept | 
|---|
| 4635 | compensation in exchange for copies.  If you distribute a large enough | 
|---|
| 4636 | number of copies you must also follow the conditions in section 3. | 
|---|
| 4637 |  | 
|---|
| 4638 | You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above, and | 
|---|
| 4639 | you may publicly display copies. | 
|---|
| 4640 |  | 
|---|
| 4641 |  | 
|---|
| 4642 | 3. COPYING IN QUANTITY | 
|---|
| 4643 |  | 
|---|
| 4644 | If you publish printed copies of the Document numbering more than 100, | 
|---|
| 4645 | and the Document's license notice requires Cover Texts, you must enclose | 
|---|
| 4646 | the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these Cover | 
|---|
| 4647 | Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on | 
|---|
| 4648 | the back cover.  Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify | 
|---|
| 4649 | you as the publisher of these copies.  The front cover must present | 
|---|
| 4650 | the full title with all words of the title equally prominent and | 
|---|
| 4651 | visible.  You may add other material on the covers in addition. | 
|---|
| 4652 | Copying with changes limited to the covers, as long as they preserve | 
|---|
| 4653 | the title of the Document and satisfy these conditions, can be treated | 
|---|
| 4654 | as verbatim copying in other respects. | 
|---|
| 4655 |  | 
|---|
| 4656 | If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit | 
|---|
| 4657 | legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit | 
|---|
| 4658 | reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto adjacent | 
|---|
| 4659 | pages. | 
|---|
| 4660 |  | 
|---|
| 4661 | If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document numbering | 
|---|
| 4662 | more than 100, you must either include a machine-readable Transparent | 
|---|
| 4663 | copy along with each Opaque copy, or state in or with each Opaque copy | 
|---|
| 4664 | a publicly-accessible computer-network location containing a complete | 
|---|
| 4665 | Transparent copy of the Document, free of added material, which the | 
|---|
| 4666 | general network-using public has access to download anonymously at no | 
|---|
| 4667 | charge using public-standard network protocols.  If you use the latter | 
|---|
| 4668 | option, you must take reasonably prudent steps, when you begin | 
|---|
| 4669 | distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure that this | 
|---|
| 4670 | Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated location | 
|---|
| 4671 | until at least one year after the last time you distribute an Opaque | 
|---|
| 4672 | copy (directly or through your agents or retailers) of that edition to | 
|---|
| 4673 | the public. | 
|---|
| 4674 |  | 
|---|
| 4675 | It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of the | 
|---|
| 4676 | Document well before redistributing any large number of copies, to give | 
|---|
| 4677 | them a chance to provide you with an updated version of the Document. | 
|---|
| 4678 |  | 
|---|
| 4679 |  | 
|---|
| 4680 | 4. MODIFICATIONS | 
|---|
| 4681 |  | 
|---|
| 4682 | You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document under | 
|---|
| 4683 | the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above, provided that you release | 
|---|
| 4684 | the Modified Version under precisely this License, with the Modified | 
|---|
| 4685 | Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution | 
|---|
| 4686 | and modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy | 
|---|
| 4687 | of it.  In addition, you must do these things in the Modified Version: | 
|---|
| 4688 |  | 
|---|
| 4689 | A. Use in the Title Page (and on the covers, if any) a title distinct | 
|---|
| 4690 | from that of the Document, and from those of previous versions | 
|---|
| 4691 | (which should, if there were any, be listed in the History section | 
|---|
| 4692 | of the Document).  You may use the same title as a previous version | 
|---|
| 4693 | if the original publisher of that version gives permission. | 
|---|
| 4694 | B. List on the Title Page, as authors, one or more persons or entities | 
|---|
| 4695 | responsible for authorship of the modifications in the Modified | 
|---|
| 4696 | Version, together with at least five of the principal authors of the | 
|---|
| 4697 | Document (all of its principal authors, if it has less than five). | 
|---|
| 4698 | C. State on the Title page the name of the publisher of the | 
|---|
| 4699 | Modified Version, as the publisher. | 
|---|
| 4700 | D. Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document. | 
|---|
| 4701 | E. Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications | 
|---|
| 4702 | adjacent to the other copyright notices. | 
|---|
| 4703 | F. Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license notice | 
|---|
| 4704 | giving the public permission to use the Modified Version under the | 
|---|
| 4705 | terms of this License, in the form shown in the Addendum below. | 
|---|
| 4706 | G. Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant Sections | 
|---|
| 4707 | and required Cover Texts given in the Document's license notice. | 
|---|
| 4708 | H. Include an unaltered copy of this License. | 
|---|
| 4709 | I. Preserve the section entitled "History", and its title, and add to | 
|---|
| 4710 | it an item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and | 
|---|
| 4711 | publisher of the Modified Version as given on the Title Page.  If | 
|---|
| 4712 | there is no section entitled "History" in the Document, create one | 
|---|
| 4713 | stating the title, year, authors, and publisher of the Document as | 
|---|
| 4714 | given on its Title Page, then add an item describing the Modified | 
|---|
| 4715 | Version as stated in the previous sentence. | 
|---|
| 4716 | J. Preserve the network location, if any, given in the Document for | 
|---|
| 4717 | public access to a Transparent copy of the Document, and likewise | 
|---|
| 4718 | the network locations given in the Document for previous versions | 
|---|
| 4719 | it was based on.  These may be placed in the "History" section. | 
|---|
| 4720 | You may omit a network location for a work that was published at | 
|---|
| 4721 | least four years before the Document itself, or if the original | 
|---|
| 4722 | publisher of the version it refers to gives permission. | 
|---|
| 4723 | K. In any section entitled "Acknowledgements" or "Dedications", | 
|---|
| 4724 | preserve the section's title, and preserve in the section all the | 
|---|
| 4725 | substance and tone of each of the contributor acknowledgements | 
|---|
| 4726 | and/or dedications given therein. | 
|---|
| 4727 | L. Preserve all the Invariant Sections of the Document, | 
|---|
| 4728 | unaltered in their text and in their titles.  Section numbers | 
|---|
| 4729 | or the equivalent are not considered part of the section titles. | 
|---|
| 4730 | M. Delete any section entitled "Endorsements".  Such a section | 
|---|
| 4731 | may not be included in the Modified Version. | 
|---|
| 4732 | N. Do not retitle any existing section as "Endorsements" | 
|---|
| 4733 | or to conflict in title with any Invariant Section. | 
|---|
| 4734 |  | 
|---|
| 4735 | If the Modified Version includes new front-matter sections or | 
|---|
| 4736 | appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no material | 
|---|
| 4737 | copied from the Document, you may at your option designate some or all | 
|---|
| 4738 | of these sections as invariant.  To do this, add their titles to the | 
|---|
| 4739 | list of Invariant Sections in the Modified Version's license notice. | 
|---|
| 4740 | These titles must be distinct from any other section titles. | 
|---|
| 4741 |  | 
|---|
| 4742 | You may add a section entitled "Endorsements", provided it contains | 
|---|
| 4743 | nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various | 
|---|
| 4744 | parties--for example, statements of peer review or that the text has | 
|---|
| 4745 | been approved by an organization as the authoritative definition of a | 
|---|
| 4746 | standard. | 
|---|
| 4747 |  | 
|---|
| 4748 | You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text, and a | 
|---|
| 4749 | passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end of the list | 
|---|
| 4750 | of Cover Texts in the Modified Version.  Only one passage of | 
|---|
| 4751 | Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by (or | 
|---|
| 4752 | through arrangements made by) any one entity.  If the Document already | 
|---|
| 4753 | includes a cover text for the same cover, previously added by you or | 
|---|
| 4754 | by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on behalf of, | 
|---|
| 4755 | you may not add another; but you may replace the old one, on explicit | 
|---|
| 4756 | permission from the previous publisher that added the old one. | 
|---|
| 4757 |  | 
|---|
| 4758 | The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this License | 
|---|
| 4759 | give permission to use their names for publicity for or to assert or | 
|---|
| 4760 | imply endorsement of any Modified Version. | 
|---|
| 4761 |  | 
|---|
| 4762 |  | 
|---|
| 4763 | 5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS | 
|---|
| 4764 |  | 
|---|
| 4765 | You may combine the Document with other documents released under this | 
|---|
| 4766 | License, under the terms defined in section 4 above for modified | 
|---|
| 4767 | versions, provided that you include in the combination all of the | 
|---|
| 4768 | Invariant Sections of all of the original documents, unmodified, and | 
|---|
| 4769 | list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined work in its | 
|---|
| 4770 | license notice. | 
|---|
| 4771 |  | 
|---|
| 4772 | The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and | 
|---|
| 4773 | multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single | 
|---|
| 4774 | copy.  If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name but | 
|---|
| 4775 | different contents, make the title of each such section unique by | 
|---|
| 4776 | adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the original | 
|---|
| 4777 | author or publisher of that section if known, or else a unique number. | 
|---|
| 4778 | Make the same adjustment to the section titles in the list of | 
|---|
| 4779 | Invariant Sections in the license notice of the combined work. | 
|---|
| 4780 |  | 
|---|
| 4781 | In the combination, you must combine any sections entitled "History" | 
|---|
| 4782 | in the various original documents, forming one section entitled | 
|---|
| 4783 | "History"; likewise combine any sections entitled "Acknowledgements", | 
|---|
| 4784 | and any sections entitled "Dedications".  You must delete all sections | 
|---|
| 4785 | entitled "Endorsements." | 
|---|
| 4786 |  | 
|---|
| 4787 |  | 
|---|
| 4788 | 6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS | 
|---|
| 4789 |  | 
|---|
| 4790 | You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other documents | 
|---|
| 4791 | released under this License, and replace the individual copies of this | 
|---|
| 4792 | License in the various documents with a single copy that is included in | 
|---|
| 4793 | the collection, provided that you follow the rules of this License for | 
|---|
| 4794 | verbatim copying of each of the documents in all other respects. | 
|---|
| 4795 |  | 
|---|
| 4796 | You may extract a single document from such a collection, and distribute | 
|---|
| 4797 | it individually under this License, provided you insert a copy of this | 
|---|
| 4798 | License into the extracted document, and follow this License in all | 
|---|
| 4799 | other respects regarding verbatim copying of that document. | 
|---|
| 4800 |  | 
|---|
| 4801 |  | 
|---|
| 4802 | 7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS | 
|---|
| 4803 |  | 
|---|
| 4804 | A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other separate | 
|---|
| 4805 | and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of a storage or | 
|---|
| 4806 | distribution medium, does not as a whole count as a Modified Version | 
|---|
| 4807 | of the Document, provided no compilation copyright is claimed for the | 
|---|
| 4808 | compilation.  Such a compilation is called an "aggregate", and this | 
|---|
| 4809 | License does not apply to the other self-contained works thus compiled | 
|---|
| 4810 | with the Document, on account of their being thus compiled, if they | 
|---|
| 4811 | are not themselves derivative works of the Document. | 
|---|
| 4812 |  | 
|---|
| 4813 | If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these | 
|---|
| 4814 | copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one quarter | 
|---|
| 4815 | of the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be placed on | 
|---|
| 4816 | covers that surround only the Document within the aggregate. | 
|---|
| 4817 | Otherwise they must appear on covers around the whole aggregate. | 
|---|
| 4818 |  | 
|---|
| 4819 |  | 
|---|
| 4820 | 8. TRANSLATION | 
|---|
| 4821 |  | 
|---|
| 4822 | Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may | 
|---|
| 4823 | distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section 4. | 
|---|
| 4824 | Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special | 
|---|
| 4825 | permission from their copyright holders, but you may include | 
|---|
| 4826 | translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the | 
|---|
| 4827 | original versions of these Invariant Sections.  You may include a | 
|---|
| 4828 | translation of this License provided that you also include the | 
|---|
| 4829 | original English version of this License.  In case of a disagreement | 
|---|
| 4830 | between the translation and the original English version of this | 
|---|
| 4831 | License, the original English version will prevail. | 
|---|
| 4832 |  | 
|---|
| 4833 |  | 
|---|
| 4834 | 9. TERMINATION | 
|---|
| 4835 |  | 
|---|
| 4836 | You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document except | 
|---|
| 4837 | as expressly provided for under this License.  Any other attempt to | 
|---|
| 4838 | copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Document is void, and will | 
|---|
| 4839 | automatically terminate your rights under this License.  However, | 
|---|
| 4840 | parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this | 
|---|
| 4841 | License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such | 
|---|
| 4842 | parties remain in full compliance. | 
|---|
| 4843 |  | 
|---|
| 4844 |  | 
|---|
| 4845 | 10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE | 
|---|
| 4846 |  | 
|---|
| 4847 | The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions | 
|---|
| 4848 | of the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time.  Such new | 
|---|
| 4849 | versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may | 
|---|
| 4850 | differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.  See | 
|---|
| 4851 | http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/. | 
|---|
| 4852 |  | 
|---|
| 4853 | Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number. | 
|---|
| 4854 | If the Document specifies that a particular numbered version of this | 
|---|
| 4855 | License "or any later version" applies to it, you have the option of | 
|---|
| 4856 | following the terms and conditions either of that specified version or | 
|---|
| 4857 | of any later version that has been published (not as a draft) by the | 
|---|
| 4858 | Free Software Foundation.  If the Document does not specify a version | 
|---|
| 4859 | number of this License, you may choose any version ever published (not | 
|---|
| 4860 | as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. | 
|---|
| 4861 |  | 
|---|
| 4862 |  | 
|---|
| 4863 | ADDENDUM: How to use this License for your documents | 
|---|
| 4864 |  | 
|---|
| 4865 | To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of | 
|---|
| 4866 | the License in the document and put the following copyright and | 
|---|
| 4867 | license notices just after the title page: | 
|---|
| 4868 |  | 
|---|
| 4869 | @smallexample | 
|---|
| 4870 | Copyright (c)  YEAR  YOUR NAME. | 
|---|
| 4871 | Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document | 
|---|
| 4872 | under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 | 
|---|
| 4873 | or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; | 
|---|
| 4874 | with the Invariant Sections being LIST THEIR TITLES, with the | 
|---|
| 4875 | Front-Cover Texts being LIST, and with the Back-Cover Texts being LIST. | 
|---|
| 4876 | A copy of the license is included in the section entitled "GNU | 
|---|
| 4877 | Free Documentation License". | 
|---|
| 4878 | @end smallexample | 
|---|
| 4879 |  | 
|---|
| 4880 | If you have no Invariant Sections, write "with no Invariant Sections" | 
|---|
| 4881 | instead of saying which ones are invariant.  If you have no | 
|---|
| 4882 | Front-Cover Texts, write "no Front-Cover Texts" instead of | 
|---|
| 4883 | "Front-Cover Texts being LIST"; likewise for Back-Cover Texts. | 
|---|
| 4884 |  | 
|---|
| 4885 | If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we | 
|---|
| 4886 | recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of | 
|---|
| 4887 | free software license, such as the GNU General Public License, | 
|---|
| 4888 | to permit their use in free software. | 
|---|
| 4889 |  | 
|---|
| 4890 | @node Index | 
|---|
| 4891 | @unnumbered Index | 
|---|
| 4892 |  | 
|---|
| 4893 | @printindex cp | 
|---|
| 4894 |  | 
|---|
| 4895 | @tex | 
|---|
| 4896 | % I think something like @colophon should be in texinfo.  In the | 
|---|
| 4897 | % meantime: | 
|---|
| 4898 | \long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill | 
|---|
| 4899 | \centerline{The body of this manual is set in} | 
|---|
| 4900 | \centerline{\fontname\tenrm,} | 
|---|
| 4901 | \centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}} | 
|---|
| 4902 | \centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.} | 
|---|
| 4903 | \centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and} | 
|---|
| 4904 | \centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}} | 
|---|
| 4905 | \centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill} | 
|---|
| 4906 | \page\colophon | 
|---|
| 4907 | % Blame: doc@cygnus.com, 28mar91. | 
|---|
| 4908 | @end tex | 
|---|
| 4909 |  | 
|---|
| 4910 |  | 
|---|
| 4911 | @contents | 
|---|
| 4912 | @bye | 
|---|
| 4913 |  | 
|---|
| 4914 |  | 
|---|